LOGO! Logo System Manual En US

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 292

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

___________________
Preface
1
___________________
Getting started with LOGO!
LOGO! installation and
2
___________________
wiring

___________________
3
Programming LOGO!
LOGO!
Manual

___________________
4
LOGO! functions
___________________
5
Configuring LOGO!
LOGO! memory and battery
___________________
6
cards

___________________
7
LOGO! software
___________________
8
Applications
___________________
A
Technical data
___________________
B
Determining the cycle time
LOGO! without display
___________________
C
("LOGO! Pure")

___________________
D
LOGO! menu structure
___________________
E
Order numbers
This manual has the order number: 6ED1050-1AA000BE7

10/2017

A5E01248535-AA

___________________
F
Abbreviations

Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.

Qualified Personnel

The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.

Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks

All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

A5E01248535-AA
Ⓟ 09/2017 Subject to change

Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.
All rights reserved

Preface
We thank you for purchasing LOGO! and congratulate you on your decision. With LOGO!
you have acquired a logic module that meets the stringent quality requirements of ISO 9001.
LOGO! can be used in many fields of applications. Due to its high functionality and easy
operation, LOGO! offers you the utmost efficiency for almost any application.

Purpose of this manual
This LOGO! manual provides you with information about the creation of circuit programs,
about the installation and use of LOGO! 0BA6 Base Modules, the LOGO! TD (Text Display),
and LOGO! expansion modules, and about their compatibility with the previous 0BA0-0BA5
versions (0BAx are the last four characters of the order number of the Base Modules and
differentiate the device series).

LOGO!'s place in information technology
The wiring information in your LOGO! manual is also found in the LOGO! Product Info
included with all devices. For further information on programming the LOGO! on your PC,
refer to the Online Help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.
LOGO!Soft Comfort is LOGO! programming software for PCs. It runs under Windows®
(including Windows Vista®), Linux®, and Mac OS X®. It helps you to get started with LOGO!
and to write, test, print out and archive your programs, independent of the LOGO!.

Guide
The manual is divided into eight chapters:
● Getting started with LOGO!
● LOGO! installation and wiring
● Programming LOGO!
● LOGO! functions
● Configuring LOGO!
● LOGO! memory and battery cards
● LOGO! software
● Applications
The manual also includes appendices A - F, which follow the chapters.

Valid range of this manual
The manual applies to devices of series 0BA6.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

3

Preface

New features of the LOGO! 0BA6 device series
● A new expansion module named LOGO! AM2 RTD is commercially available. The
module is equipped with two analog inputs for connection to PT100 and/or PT1000
sensors with the default temperature coefficient of α = 0.003850 for both sensor types.
The LOGO! AM2 PT100 expansion module, however, only supports PT100 sensors.
● The LOGO! AM2 RTD module can automatically recognize the sensor type. It is thus
unnecessary for you to make any configuration or setting to achieve this.
● Two new LOGO! versions LOGO! 24C and LOGO! 24Co (each with a built-in real-time
clock) are commercially available.
● The LOGO! TD (Text Display) provides an additional display device for messages, and
contains four cursor keys and four functions keys that can be used in the circuit program.
● An additional password protection function is available in the LOGO! TD (version ES4 or
later) and can only be enabled when the LOGO! TD is used together with a LOGO! Base
Module (version ES4 or later).
● The new LOGO! Battery Card and the LOGO! Combined Memory/Battery Card provide
up to two years of backup time for the real–time clock. The new LOGO! Memory Card and
the Combined Memory/Battery Card provide 32 Kbytes memory space.
● Additional optional analog inputs and fast digital inputs are available on some of the
LOGO! 0BA6 Base Modules.
● LOGO! 0BA6 configuration menus can be displayed in one of ten supported languages.
You have a configuration choice to specify the language for LOGO! menus.
● New instruction blocks are available: Pulse Width Modulator (PWM), Analog Math, and
Analog Math Error Detection.
● Message texts can tick on and off the display; can include bar graphs, can switch
between two character sets, and can be displayed on either the LOGO! onboard display,
the LOGO! TD, or both. Full editing capabilities are available from LOGO!Soft Comfort;
editing from the LOGO! Basic is limited to simple text. See topic "Compatibility (Page 31)"
for further details.
● A modem interface between a PC and LOGO! 0BA6 Base Module is supported, and is
configurable only from LOGO!Soft Comfort. LOGO! 0BA6 supports the following modems:
– INSYS Modem 336 4 1
– INSYS Modem 56K small INT 2.0
You can also use other modems with LOGO! 0BA6 provided that these modems meet the
requirements specified in the "Connecting modems (Page 51)" topic.
● USB PC cable between a PC and LOGO! Base Module is available as an option.
● Modem cable between a modem and LOGO! Base Module is available as an option.
● This series supports 0/4–20 mA for the AM2 AQ analog outputs.
● You can now have up to 200 program blocks in your circuit program.

LOGO!

4

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Preface

Additional differences compared to previous devices (0BA0 to 0BA5)
● Extended set of reference parameters for function blocks.
● Enhancements to up/down counter, hours counter, yearly timer and analog watchdog
instruction blocks.
For more detailed information, refer to the topic "Compatibility (Page 31)".

Additional support
Siemens LOGO! Website (http://www.siemens.com/logo)

Security information
Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens' products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be
connected to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is
necessary and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network
segmentation) are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens' products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customers' exposure
to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

5

Preface

LOGO!

6

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Table of contents
Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1

Getting started with LOGO! ................................................................................................................... 11

2

LOGO! installation and wiring ................................................................................................................ 25

3

2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3

Modular LOGO! setup .............................................................................................................27
Maximum setup .......................................................................................................................27
Setup with different voltage classes .......................................................................................29
Compatibility ...........................................................................................................................31

2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4

Installing/removing LOGO! .....................................................................................................31
DIN rail mounting ....................................................................................................................32
Wall-mounting .........................................................................................................................34
Mounting the LOGO! TD .........................................................................................................35
Labeling LOGO! ......................................................................................................................36

2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7

Wiring LOGO! .........................................................................................................................36
Connecting the power supply .................................................................................................37
Connecting the LOGO! TD power supply ...............................................................................38
Connecting LOGO! inputs .......................................................................................................39
Connecting outputs .................................................................................................................46
Connecting the EIB bus ..........................................................................................................48
Connecting the AS interface bus ............................................................................................49
Connecting modems ...............................................................................................................51

2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3

Putting into operation ..............................................................................................................52
Switching the LOGO!/Power On .............................................................................................52
Putting a CM EIB/KNX into operation .....................................................................................54
Operating states ......................................................................................................................55

Programming LOGO! ............................................................................................................................ 57
3.1

Connectors ..............................................................................................................................58

3.2

EIB inputs/outputs ...................................................................................................................60

3.3

Blocks and block numbers ......................................................................................................61

3.4

From circuit diagram to LOGO! program ................................................................................63

3.5

The four golden rules for operating LOGO! ............................................................................66

3.6

Overview of LOGO! menus .....................................................................................................68

3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.7.4
3.7.5
3.7.6
3.7.7

Writing and starting the circuit program ..................................................................................69
Selecting programming mode .................................................................................................69
The first circuit program ..........................................................................................................70
Circuit program input...............................................................................................................71
Assigning a circuit program name ..........................................................................................75
Password ................................................................................................................................76
Switching LOGO! to RUN mode .............................................................................................81
Second circuit program ...........................................................................................................83

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

7

Table of contents

4

3.7.8
3.7.9
3.7.10
3.7.11
3.7.12
3.7.13
3.7.14
3.7.15

Deleting a block...................................................................................................................... 88
Deleting block groups ............................................................................................................ 89
Correcting programming errors .............................................................................................. 90
Selecting analog output values for RUN/STOP transition ..................................................... 90
Defining the type of analog outputs ....................................................................................... 91
Deleting the circuit program and password ........................................................................... 92
Summertime/wintertime conversion ....................................................................................... 93
Synchronization...................................................................................................................... 96

3.8

Memory space and circuit program size ................................................................................ 98

LOGO! functions ..................................................................................................................................103
4.1

Constants and connectors - Co ........................................................................................... 103

4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8

Basic functions list - GF ....................................................................................................... 107
AND ...................................................................................................................................... 108
AND with edge evaluation .................................................................................................... 109
NAND (not AND) .................................................................................................................. 109
NAND with edge evaluation ................................................................................................. 110
OR ........................................................................................................................................ 111
NOR (not OR) ...................................................................................................................... 112
XOR (exclusive OR) ............................................................................................................. 113
NOT (Negation, Inverter) ..................................................................................................... 113

4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
4.3.6

Special Functions ................................................................................................................. 114
Designation of the inputs ..................................................................................................... 114
Time response ..................................................................................................................... 115
Backup of the real-time clock ............................................................................................... 116
Retentivity ............................................................................................................................ 116
Parameter protection ........................................................................................................... 117
Calculating the gain and offset of analog values ................................................................. 117

4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.4.5
4.4.6
4.4.7
4.4.8
4.4.9
4.4.10
4.4.11
4.4.12
4.4.13
4.4.14
4.4.15
4.4.16
4.4.17
4.4.18
4.4.19
4.4.20
4.4.21

Special functions list - SF ..................................................................................................... 119
On-delay ............................................................................................................................... 123
Off-delay ............................................................................................................................... 126
On-/Off-delay........................................................................................................................ 127
Retentive on-delay ............................................................................................................... 129
Wiping relay (pulse output) .................................................................................................. 130
Edge triggered wiping relay ................................................................................................. 132
Asynchronous pulse generator ............................................................................................ 134
Random generator ............................................................................................................... 135
Stairway lighting switch ........................................................................................................ 137
Multiple function switch ........................................................................................................ 139
Weekly timer ........................................................................................................................ 141
Yearly timer .......................................................................................................................... 145
Up/down counter .................................................................................................................. 151
Hours counter....................................................................................................................... 154
Threshold trigger .................................................................................................................. 158
Analog threshold trigger ....................................................................................................... 160
Analog differential trigger ..................................................................................................... 163
Analog comparator ............................................................................................................... 165
Analog watchdog.................................................................................................................. 170
Analog amplifier ................................................................................................................... 173
Latching relay ....................................................................................................................... 175

LOGO!

8

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Table of contents

4.4.22
4.4.23
4.4.24
4.4.25
4.4.26
4.4.27
4.4.28
4.4.29
4.4.30
4.4.31
5

6

7

Pulse relay ............................................................................................................................176
Message texts .......................................................................................................................178
Softkey ..................................................................................................................................189
Shift register ..........................................................................................................................191
Analog Multiplexer ................................................................................................................194
Analog Ramp ........................................................................................................................197
PI controller ...........................................................................................................................201
Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) .............................................................................................206
Analog math ..........................................................................................................................209
Analog math error detection .................................................................................................212

Configuring LOGO! ............................................................................................................................. 215
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3

Selecting parameter assignment mode ................................................................................215
Parameters ...........................................................................................................................217
Selecting the parameters ......................................................................................................218
Modifying parameters ...........................................................................................................219

5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5

Setting the default values for LOGO! ....................................................................................221
Setting the time of day and date (LOGO! ... C) ....................................................................222
Setting the display contrast and backlight choice .................................................................223
Setting the menu language ...................................................................................................224
Setting the number of AIs in the LOGO! Basic .....................................................................225
Setting the start screen .........................................................................................................226

LOGO! memory and battery cards ....................................................................................................... 227
6.1

Security function (CopyProtect) ............................................................................................229

6.2

Inserting and removing memory and battery cards ..............................................................231

6.3

Copying data from LOGO! to the memory card ....................................................................233

6.4

Copying data from the memory card to LOGO! ....................................................................234

LOGO! software .................................................................................................................................. 237
7.1

LOGO! software ....................................................................................................................237

7.2

Connecting LOGO! to a PC ..................................................................................................239

8

Applications ........................................................................................................................................ 241

A

Technical data .................................................................................................................................... 245
A.1

General technical data ..........................................................................................................245

A.2

Technical data: LOGO! 230... ...............................................................................................246

A.3

Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R ...............................................249

A.4

Technical data: LOGO! 24... .................................................................................................251

A.5

Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24 and LOGO! DM16 24 ........................................................253

A.6

Technical data: LOGO! 24RC... ............................................................................................255

A.7

Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24R and LOGO! DM16 24R ...................................................257

A.8

Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R ..........................................................258

A.9

Switching capacity/service life of the relay outputs ..............................................................261

A.10

Technical data: LOGO! AM2 .................................................................................................262

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

9

Table of contents

A.11

Technical data: LOGO! AM2 PT100 .................................................................................... 263

A.12

Technical data: LOGO! AM2 RTD ....................................................................................... 264

A.13

Technical data: LOGO! AM2 AQ .......................................................................................... 265

A.14

Technical data: CM EIB/KNX ............................................................................................... 266

A.15

Technical data: CM AS Interface ......................................................................................... 267

A.16

Technical data: LOGO!Power 12 V...................................................................................... 268

A.17

Technical data: LOGO!Power 24 V...................................................................................... 269

A.18

Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230 ............................................................................... 271

A.19

Technical data: LOGO! TD (Text Display) ........................................................................... 272

A.20

Technical data: Battery information for LOGO! cards .......................................................... 273

B

Determining the cycle time ...................................................................................................................275

C

LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure") ................................................................................................277

D

LOGO! menu structure .........................................................................................................................279
D.1

LOGO! Basic ........................................................................................................................ 279

D.2

LOGO! TD ............................................................................................................................ 283

E

Order numbers.....................................................................................................................................285

F

Abbreviations .......................................................................................................................................287
Index ...................................................................................................................................................289

LOGO!

10

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Getting started with LOGO!

1

Here's LOGO!
LOGO! is a universal logic module made by Siemens that integrates:
● Controls
● Operator and display panel with background lighting
● Power supply
● Interface for expansion modules
● Interface for a memory card, battery card, combined memory/battery card, LOGO! PC
cable or USB PC cable.
● Interface for an optional text display (TD) module
● Pre-configured standard functions, for example, on- and off-delays, pulse relay and
softkey
● Timers
● Digital and analog flags
● Inputs and outputs, according to the device type

What LOGO! can do for you
LOGO! offers solutions for domestic and installation engineering applications such as
stairway lighting, external lighting, sun blinds, shutters, shop window lighting and more;
switch cabinet engineering, as well as for mechanical and apparatus engineering such as
gate control systems, air-conditioning systems, and rainwater pumps.
LOGO! can also be implemented for special control systems in conservatories or
greenhouses, for control signal processing and, by connecting a communication module
such as an AS-i module, for distributed local controlling of machines and processes.
Special versions without operator panel and display unit are available for series production
applications in small machine, apparatus, switching cabinet and installation engineering.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

11

Getting started with LOGO!

Which devices are available?
LOGO! Base Modules are available in two voltage classes:
● Class 1 ≤ 24 V, i.e. 12 V DC, 24 V DC, 24 V AC
● Class 2 > 24 V, i.e. 115...240 V AC/DC
LOGO! Base Modules are available in two versions:
● LOGO! Basic (version with display): 8 inputs and 4 outputs
● LOGO! Pure (version without display): 8 inputs and 4 outputs
Each version is integrated into four subunits, is equipped with an expansion interface and
LOGO! TD interface and provides 39 pre-configured standard and special function blocks for
the creation of your circuit program.

Which expansion modules are available?
● LOGO! digital modules DM8... are available for operation with 12 V DC, 24 V AC/DC and
115...240 V AC/DC, and are equipped with four inputs and four outputs.
● LOGO! digital modules DM16... are available for operation with 24 V DC and 115...240 V
AC/DC, and are equipped with eight inputs and eight outputs.
● LOGO! analog modules are available for operation with 24 V DC and some with 12 V DC,
depending on the specific module. Each is equipped with two analog inputs, two PT100
inputs, two PT100/PT1000 inputs (either PT100 or PT1000 or one of each), or two analog
outputs.
The digital/analog modules are integrated in two or four subunits. Each one is equipped with
two expansion interfaces for connecting additional modules.

Which display modules are available?
● LOGO! Basic
● LOGO! TD

LOGO!

12

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Getting started with LOGO!

Features of the LOGO! TD
The LOGO! TD is available beginning with the 0BA6 series. It provides an additional display
that is wider than the LOGO! Basic. It has four function keys that you can program in your
circuit program as inputs. Like the LOGO! Basic, it has four cursor keys, an ESC key and an
OK key that you can also program in your circuit program and use for navigation on the
LOGO! TD.
You can create and download a power-up screen for the LOGO! TD from LOGO!Soft
Comfort. This screen displays briefly when you initially power on the LOGO! TD. You can
also upload the power-up screen from the LOGO! TD to LOGO!Soft Comfort.
The menus for the LOGO! TD are shown in Appendix section D.2. You configure the settings
for the LOGO! TD independently from the LOGO! Basic. The settings can be different.

Which communication modules are available?
● LOGO! communication module (CM) AS interface, which is described in more detail in a
separate documentation.
The communication module has four virtual inputs and outputs, and acts as an interface
between an AS-Interface system and a LOGO! system. The module enables four data
bits to be transferred from the LOGO! Base Module to the AS-Interface system and vice
versa.
● LOGO! communication module (CM) EIB/KNX, which is described in more detail in a
separate documentation.
CM EIB/KNX is a communication module (CM) for connecting the LOGO! to the EIB.
As an interface to EIB, CM EIB/KNX makes it possible to communicate with other EIB
devices. To do this, you store a configuration in the CM EIB/KNX that specifies the
inputs/outputs of the LOGO! to the EIB bus that are to be mapped. You can interconnect
the corresponding inputs/outputs using LOGO! functions.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

13

Getting started with LOGO!

It's your choice
The various LOGO! Base Modules, expansion modules, LOGO! TD and communication
modules offer you a highly flexible and adaptive system to suit your specific tasks.
The LOGO! system offers you many solutions such as for small domestic installations,
simple automation tasks, and even complex engineering tasks involving its integration into a
bus system (e.g. communication module AS interface).
Note
The LOGO! Base Module may only be equipped with expansion modules of the same
voltage class. Mechanical encoding pins in the housing prevent you from connecting devices
of a different voltage class.
Exception: The interface on the left side of an analog module or communication module is
galvanically isolated.
This type of expansion module can therefore be connected to devices of a different voltage
class (Page 29).
A LOGO! TD, if used, can be connected to only one LOGO! Base Module.
Each LOGO! Base Module supports the following connections for the creation of the circuit
program, regardless of the number of connected modules:
• Digital inputs I1 to I24
• Analog inputs AI1 to AI8
• Digital outputs Q1 to Q16
• Analog outputs AQ1 to AQ2
• Digital flag blocks M1 to M27:
– M8: Startup flag
– M25: Backlight flag: LOGO! onboard display
– M26: Backlight flag: LOGO! TD
– M27: Message text character set flag
• Analog flag blocks AM1 to AM6
• Shift register bits S1 to S8
• 4 cursor keys
• 16 blank outputs X1 to X16

LOGO!

14

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Getting started with LOGO!

The LOGO! structure

①
②
③
④
⑤
⑥

Power supply
Inputs
Outputs
Module slot with cap
Control panel (nor for RCo)
LCD (not for RCo)

⑦
⑧
⑨
⑩
⑪
⑫

RUN/STOP indicator
Expansion interface
Mechanical coding pins
Mechanical coding sockets
Slide
LOGO! TD cable connector

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

15

Getting started with LOGO!

①
②
③
④
⑤
⑥

Power supply
Inputs
Outputs
Module slot with cap
Control panel (not for RCo)
LCD (not for RCo)

⑦
⑧
⑨
⑩
⑪
⑫

RUN/STOP indicator
Expansion interface
Mechanical coding pins
Mechanical coding sockets
Slide
LOGO! TD cable connector

LOGO!

16

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Getting started with LOGO!

①
②
⑦
⑧

Power supply

①
②
⑦
⑧

Power supply

Outputs
RUN/STOP indicator
Expansion interface

Inputs
RUN/STOP indicator
Expansion interface

⑨
⑩
⑪
⑫

⑨
⑩
⑪
⑫

Mechanical coding pins
Mechanical coding sockets
Slide
PE terminal, for connecting earth and the shielding of
analog measuring cables

Mechanical coding pins
Mechanical coding sockets
Slide
PE terminal, for connecting earth

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

17

Getting started with LOGO!

①
②
⑦
⑧
⑨

Power supply
EIB bus connection
RUN/STOP indicator
Expansion interface

⑩
⑪
⑫
⑬

Mechanical coding sockets
Slide
LED for status display of EIB/KNX
Programming button

Mechanical coding pins

LOGO! TD

① Communication interface
② Power supply
The LOGO! TD includes a wider display area than the LOGO! onboard display. It includes
four programmable cursor keys, four programmable function keys, and an ESC and OK key.
You use the included LOGO! TD cable to connect from the communication interface on the
right side of the LOGO! TD to the corresponding interface on the left side of the LOGO! Base
Module.

LOGO!

18

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Getting started with LOGO!

How to identify LOGO!
The LOGO! identifier informs you of various properties:
● 12/24: 12/24 V DC version
● 230: 115...240 V AC/DC version
● R: Relay outputs (without R: solid-state outputs)
● C: Integrated real-time clock
● o: Version without display ("LOGO! Pure")
● DM: Digital module
● AM: Analog module
● CM: Communication module (e.g. EIB/KNX module)
● TD: Text Display

Symbols
Version with display unit is equipped with 8 inputs and 4 outputs

Version without display unit is equipped with 8 inputs and 4 outputs

The digital module is equipped with 4 digital inputs and 4 digital outputs

The digital module is equipped with 8 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs

The analog module is equipped with 2 analog inputs or 2 analog outputs, according to
the device type
The communication module (CM); for example, AS Interface is equipped with 4 virtual
inputs and 4 virtual outputs

The LOGO! TD

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

19

Getting started with LOGO!

Versions
The following LOGO! versions are available:
Symbol

Designation

Supply voltage

Inputs

Outputs

LOGO! 12/24RC

12/24 V DC

8 digital

LOGO! 24

24 V DC

8 digital 1)

4 solid state
24V / 0.3A

LOGO! 24C

24 V DC

8 digital 1)

4 solid state
24V / 0.3A

LOGO! 24RC 3)

24 V AC/
24 V DC

8 digital

4 relays
(10A)

LOGO! 230RC 2)

115...240 V
AC/DC

8 digital

4 relays
(10A)

LOGO! 12/24RCo

12/24 V DC

8 digital 1)

4 relays
(10A)

no display unit

LOGO! 24o

24 V DC

8 digital 1)

4 solid state
24 V / 0.3A

no display unit

1)

Properties

4 relays
(10 A)
no clock

no keyboard
no keyboard
no clock

LOGO! 24Co

24 V DC

8 digital

4 solid state
24 V / 0.3A

no display unit

LOGO! 24RCo 3)

24 V AC / 24 V
DC

8 digital

4 relays
(10A)

no display unit

LOGO! 230RCo 2)

115...240 V
AC/DC

8 digital

4 relays
(10A)

no display unit

1)

no keyboard
no keyboard
no keyboard

1)

Of those can be used alternatively: 4 analog inputs (0 ... 10V) and 4 fast digital inputs.

2)

230 V AC versions: Two groups consisting of 4 inputs each. Each input within a group must be
connected to the same phase. It is possible to interconnect groups with a different phase.

3)

The digital inputs can be operated with P or N action.

LOGO!

20

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Getting started with LOGO!

Expansion modules
The following expansion modules can be connected to LOGO!:
Symbol

Name

Power supply

Inputs

Outputs

LOGO! DM8 12/24R

12/24 V DC

4 digital

4 relays (5A)

LOGO! DM8 24

24 V DC

4 digital

4 solid state 24V /
0.3A

LOGO! DM8 24R 3)

24 V AC/DC

4 digital

4 relays (5A)

LOGO! DM8 230R

115...240 V AC/DC

4 digital 1)

4 relays (5A)

LOGO! DM16 24

24 V DC

8 digital

8 solid state
24V / 0.3A

LOGO! DM16 24R

24 V DC

8 digital

LOGO! DM16 230R

115...240 V AC/DC

8 digital

LOGO! AM2

12/24 V DC

2 analog
0 ... 10V or
0/4 ... 20mA 2)

None

LOGO! AM2 PT100

12/24 V DC

2 PT100 6)
-50 degrees C to
+200 degrees C

None

LOGO! AM2 RTD

12/24 V DC

2 PT100 or 2 PT1000
or 1 PT100 plus 1
PT1000 6)

None

8 relays (5A)
4)

8 relays (5A)

-50 degrees C to
+200 degrees C
LOGO! AM2 AQ

24 V DC

None

2 analog
0 ... 10 V DC or
0/4...20mA 5)

1)

Different phases are not allowed within the inputs.

2)

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA can be connected optionally.

3)

Digital inputs can be operated either with P or with N action.

4)

Two groups consisting of 4 inputs each. Each input within a group must be connected to the same
phase. It is possible to interconnect groups with a different phase.

5)

0 ... 10 V, 0/4 ... 20 mA can be connected optionally. The 0/4 ... 20 mA current output is only possible with the LOGO! 0BA6 Base Module.

6)

Sensors supported by the LOGO! AM2 RTD module are the PT100 and PT1000 sensors with a
default temperature coefficient α of 0.003850.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

21

Getting started with LOGO!

Communication modules
The following communication modules can be connected to LOGO!:
Symbol

Name

Power supply

LOGO! CM AS Interface 30 V DC

LOGO! CM EIB/KNX

24 V AC/DC

Inputs

Outputs

the next four
inputs after the
physical inputs of
LOGO!

the next four
outputs after the
physical outputs
of LOGO!

(ln ... ln+3)

(Qn ... Qn+3)

max. 16 virtual
digital inputs (I);
max. 8 virtual
analog inputs
(AI)

max. 12 virtual
digital outputs
(Q);
max. 2 virtual
analog outputs
(AQ)

Text Display Module
The following LOGO! TD module is available:
Symbol

Name

Supply voltage

Display

LOGO! TD

24 V AC/DC
12 V DC

LCD (128 x 64)
4-row display

LOGO!

22

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Getting started with LOGO!

Certification and approvals
LOGO! is certified to cULus and FM.
● cULus Haz. Loc.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) to
- UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
- CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)
- UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
- CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
● FM Approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) to
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
Note
You will find current approvals on the rating plate of the relevant module.
LOGO! is issued with the CE Certificate of Conformity. It is compliant with IEC 60730-1 and
IEC 61131-2 and interference-proof to EN 55011, Limit Class B.
Marine certification has been requested.
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
LOGO! modules are therefore suitable for use in industrial and residential areas. Use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C and D locations or in non-hazardous locations is
supported.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

23

Getting started with LOGO!

ID for Australia
Our products carrying the label shown at the side are compliant with AS/NZS
2064:1997 (Class A) standard.

WARNING
Risk of death, personal injury or property damage can occur if you do not follow safety
precautions for hazardous locations.
In potentially explosive atmospheres, do not disconnect connectors when the system is in
RUN. Always switch off the power supply to LOGO! and its components before you
disconnect any connectors or components.
Substitution of components can impair suitability for Class I, Division 2 locations.
Combinations of equipment are subject to investigation by the local authority having
jurisdiction at the time of the installation.

Recycling and Disposal
LOGO! units can be fully recycled, due to their low-pollutant equipment. Contact a certified
electronic waste disposal center for environmentally acceptable recycling and disposal of
your old devices.

LOGO!

24

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring

2

General guidelines
Please note the following guidelines for installing and wiring your LOGO!:
● Always ensure that the wiring of your LOGO! is compliant with current rules and
standards. Also, conform with all national and regional regulations when you install and
operate the devices. For information on standards and regulations that apply to your
specific case, contact your local authorities.
● Always switch off power before you wire or install/remove a module.
● Always use cables with appropriate conductor cross-sections for the relevant current. You
can wire LOGO! with cable conductor cross-sections (Page 36) from 1.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2.
● Do not exceed the screw torque of the terminals. The maximum torque is: 0.5 Nm..
● Keep the cabling as short as possible. If longer cables are necessary, you should use
shielded versions. You should always route your cables in pairs: i.e. one neutral
conductor plus one phase conductor or signal line.
● Always keep separate:
– The AC wiring
– High-voltage DC circuits with high-frequency switching cycles
– Low-voltage signal wiring
– The EIB bus cable may also be laid in parallel to other signal lines
● Ensure that the wires are installed with appropriate strain relief.
● Provide a suitable lightning surge arrester for cables installed in hazardous areas.
● Do not connect an external power supply in parallel to the output load of a DC output.
This could develop a reverse current at the output if you have not installed a diode or
similar barrier device.
● Reliable functioning of the equipment is only ensured with certified components!
Note
LOGO! devices may only be installed and wired by skilled personnel who are familiar with
and follow general engineering rules and relevant regulations and standards.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

25

LOGO! installation and wiring

What you must note when installing
LOGO! is designed for fixed and enclosed installation in the housing or the control cabinet.
WARNING
Attempts to install or wire LOGO! or related equipment with power applied could cause
electric shock or faulty operation of the equipment. Failure to disable all power to LOGO!
and related equipment during installation or removal procedures could result in death or
serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Always follow appropriate safety precautions and ensure that power to LOGO! is disabled
before attempting to install or remove LOGO! or related equipment.
Modules of a LOGO! are open facilities. This means that you must install LOGO! only in a
housing or cabinet.
Allow access to the housings or cabinets only with the use of a key or a tool and only allow
access to authorized or approved personnel.
It is permissible to operate LOGO! from the front at any time.

Safety of electronic control equipment
Introduction
The notes below apply regardless of the type or manufacturer of the electronic control.
Reliability
Maximum reliability of LOGO! devices and components is achieved by implementing
extensive and cost-effective measures during development and manufacture.
This includes the following:
● Use of high-quality components
● Design of all circuits for worst-case scenarios
● Systematic and computer-aided testing of all components
● Burn-in of all large-scale integrated circuits (for example, processors, memory and so on)
● Prevention of static charge when handling MOS ICs
● Visual checks at different stages of manufacture
● Continuous heat-run test at elevated ambient temperature over a period of several days
● Careful computer-controlled final testing
● Statistical evaluation of all returned systems and components to enable the immediate
initiation of suitable corrective measures
● Monitoring of major control components, using online tests (cyclic interrupt for the CPU,
etc.)
These measures are referred to as basic measures.

LOGO!

26

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.1 Modular LOGO! setup
Carrying out tests
You must ensure safety in your plant.
Before finally commissioning a system, carry out complete functional testing as well as all
the necessary safety testing.
Also, test for any predictable faults that can occur. This means that you will avoid any danger
to the plant or to people during operation.
Risks
In all cases where the occurrence of failures can result in material damage or injury to
persons, take special measures to enhance the safety of the installation - and the
application. System-specific and special regulations exist for such applications. Follow these
regulations exactly when installing the control system (for example, VDE 0116 for burner
control systems).
For electronic control equipment with a safety function, the measures that you must take to
prevent or rectify faults are based on the risks involved in the installation. Beyond a certain
degree of hazard the basic measures mentioned above are not sufficient and you must take
additional safety measures for the controller.
Important information
Follow the instructions in the operating manual exactly. Incorrect handling can render
measures intended to prevent dangerous faults ineffective, or generate additional sources of
danger.

2.1

Modular LOGO! setup

2.1.1

Maximum setup
LOGO! supports a maximum of 24 digital inputs, 8 analog inputs, 16 digital outputs, and 2
analog outputs (Page 11). You can achieve the maximum setup in different ways as shown
below:

Maximum setup of a LOGO! with analog inputs onboard - four in use
LOGO! Base Module, 4 digital modules and 3 analog modules (example)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

27

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.1 Modular LOGO! setup

Maximum setup of a LOGO! with analog inputs onboard - two in use
LOGO! Base Module, 4 digital modules and 4 analog modules (example)

Maximum setup of a LOGO! without analog inputs onboard (LOGO! 24 RC/RCo and LOGO!
230RC/RCo)
LOGO! Base Module, 4 digital modules and 5 analog modules (example)

For LOGO! 12/24 RC/RCo, LOGO! 24/24o, LOGO! 24C/24Co modules, you can configure
whether the module uses two or four of the four possible analog inputs. AI inputs are
numbered consecutively depending on how many you configure the LOGO! Base Module to
use. If you configure two inputs, they are numbered AI1 and AI2, and correspond to the I7
and I8 input terminals. Subsequent AI expansions modules would begin numbering at AI3. If
you configure four inputs, they are numbered AI1, AI2, AI3, and AI4, and correspond to I7,
I8, I1, and I2 in that order. Subsequent AI expansions modules would begin numbering at
AI5. See topics "Constants and connectors - Co (Page 103)" and "Setting the number of AIs
in the LOGO! Basic (Page 225)".

LOGO!

28

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.1 Modular LOGO! setup

High-speed/optimal communication performance
For optimal and high-speed communication performance between the LOGO! Base Module
and the various modules, we recommend that you install the digital modules first, then the
analog modules (examples above). (The special function PI controller is an exception: the AI
used for the value PV should be on the LOGO! Base Module or an analog input module
adjacent to the LOGO! Base Module).
Siemens recommends that you position the CM AS Interface on the far right. (If the AS
Interface voltage fails, communication between the LOGO! system and expansion modules
that are arranged to the right of the LOGO! CM AS Interface expansion module is
interrupted).
The LOGO! TD module is installed separately. You connect it to the LOGO! Base Module
with the included LOGO! TD cable.
Note
CM EIB/KNX must always be installed as the last module on the right of LOGO!.
No further interface modules may be connected to the CM EIB/KNX.

2.1.2

Setup with different voltage classes

Rules
Digital modules can only be directly connected to devices of the same voltage class.
You can connect analog and communication modules to devices of any voltage class.
You can replace two similar DM8 expansion modules by one appropriate DM16 expansion
module (and vice versa) without having to change the circuit program.
Note
Two DM8 12/24R can be replaced by one DM16 24R only if operated with a power supply of
24 V DC.
Two DM8 24R can be replaced by one DM16 24R only if operated with DC and P action.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

29

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.1 Modular LOGO! setup

Overview: Connecting an expansion module to the LOGO! Base Module
In the following tables, "X" means that the connection is possible; "-" means that the
connection is not possible.
LOGO! Base Module

Expansion modules
DM8
12/24R,
DM16
24R

DM8 24, DM 8
DM16
24R
24

DM8
230R,
DM16
230R

AM2,
AM2 PT100,
AM2 RTD,
AM2 AQ

CM

LOGO! 12/24RC

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO! 24

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO! 24C

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO! 24RC

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO! 230RC

-

-

-

x

x

x

LOGO! 12/24RCo

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO! 24o

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO! 24Co

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO! 24RCo

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO! 230RCo

-

-

-

x

x

x

Overview: Connecting an additional expansion module to an expansion module
Expansion module

Additional expansion modules
DM8
12/24R,
DM16
24R

DM8 24,
DM16 24

DM8 24R DM8
230R,
DM16
230R

AM2,
AM2 PT100,
AM2 RTD,
AM2 AQ

CM

DM8 12/24R,
DM16 24R

x

x

x

-

x

x

DM8 24,
DM16 24

x

x

x

-

x

x

DM8 24 R

x

x

x

-

x

x

DM8 230R,
DM16 230R

-

-

-

x

x

x

AM2,
AM2 PT100,
AM2 RTD,
AM2 AQ

x

x

x

-

x

x

CM AS Interface

x

x

x

-

x

x

CM EIB/KNX

x

x

x

-

x

x

LOGO!

30

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

2.1.3

Compatibility
The LOGO! TD module can only be used with equipment series 0BA6.
You cannot edit message texts from the LOGO! Base Module that contain any of the
following parameters:
● Par
● Time
● Date
● EnTime
● EnDate
You can only edit such message texts from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
When using the LOGO! AM2 AQ analog module with equipment series 0BA4 or 0BA5, the
functions are limited to the ones available on this equipment. You cannot use the module
with equipment series 0BA3 or earlier.
All other expansion modules are completely compatible with the LOGO! Base Modules of
equipment series 0BA3, 0BA4, 0BA5, and 0BA6.

2.2

Installing/removing LOGO!

Dimensions
The LOGO! installation dimensions are compliant with DIN 43880.
LOGO! can be snap-mounted to 35 mm DIN rails to EN 50022 or on the wall.
LOGO! width:
● LOGO! TD has a width of 128.2 mm, which corresponds to 8 subunits
● LOGO! Base Modules have a width of 72 mm, which corresponds to 4 subunits
● LOGO! expansion modules have a width of 36 mm or 72 mm (DM16...), which
corresponds to 2 or 4 subunits
Note
The figure below shows you an example of the installation and removal of a LOGO! 230
RC and a digital module. The measures shown apply to all other LOGO! Base Module
versions and expansion modules.

WARNING
Always switch off power before you remove or insert an expansion module.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

31

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

2.2.1

DIN rail mounting

Mounting
How to mount a LOGO! Base Module and a digital module onto a DIN rail:
1. Hook the LOGO! Base Module onto the rail.
2. Push down the lower end to snap it on. The mounting interlock at the rear must engage.

3. On the right side of the LOGO! Base Module/LOGO! expansion module, remove the
connector cap.
4. Place the digital module onto the DIN rail on the right-hand side of the LOGO! Base
Module.
5. Slide the digital module towards the left until it contacts the LOGO! Base Module.
6. Using a screwdriver, push the interlock to the left. In its end position the slide interlock
engages in the LOGO! Base Module.

LOGO!

32

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!
Repeat the digital module steps to mount further expansion modules.
Note
The expansion interface on the last expansion module must be covered.

Removal
To remove LOGO!:
....... if you have installed only one LOGO! Base Module:
1. Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and move the latch
downward.
2. Swing the LOGO! Base Module off the DIN rail.

....... if you have connected at least one expansion module to the LOGO! Base Module:
1. Using a screwdriver, push the integrate slide interlock to the right.
2. Slide the expansion module off towards the right.
3. Insert a screwdriver into the eyelet at the bottom of the slide interlock and lever it
downward.
4. Swing the expansion module off the profile rail.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

33

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!
Repeat steps 1 to 4 for all other expansion modules.
Note
If you have connected more than one expansion module, it is advisable to start removal with
the last module at the right-hand side.
Make sure the slide interlock of the module to be installed/removed is not engaged in the
next module.

2.2.2

Wall-mounting
For wall-mounting, first slide the mounting slides on the rear side of the devices towards the
outside. You can now wall-mount LOGO! by means of two mounting slides and two Ø M4
screws (tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm).

LOGO!

34

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.2 Installing/removing LOGO!

Drilling template for wall-mounting
Before you can wall-mount LOGO!, you need to drill holes using the template shown below.

All dimensions in mm
Bore hole for Ø M4 screw, tightening torque 0.8 to 1.2 Nm

①LOGO! Base Module
② LOGO! expansion modules, DM *..., AM...
③ LOGO! expansion modules, DM 16...

2.2.3

Mounting the LOGO! TD
To prepare the mounting surface for the optional LOGO! TD and mount it, follow these steps:
1. Cut a 119.5 mm x 78.5 mm (tolerance: +0.5 mm) hole in the mounting surface.

2. Place the included gasket on the frontplate of the LOGO! TD.
3. Fit the LOGO! TD into the cutout you made in the mounting surface.
4. Attach the mounting brackets (included) to the LOGO! TD.
5. Tighten the mounting screws on the mounting brackets to 0.2 Nm torque to secure the
LOGO! TD.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

35

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

① Mounting brackets
② Mounting screws
③ Gasket
④ Cabinet door or control panel

(Thickness: 1.5 to 4 mm)

You can then use the included cable to connect the LOGO! TD to the LOGO! Base Module
up to a distance of 2.5 meters. You can extend this distance to up to ten meters by using a
standard Sub-D cable together with the LOGO! TD cable.

2.2.4

Labeling LOGO!
The gray rectangular areas on the LOGO! modules are intended for labeling.
In the case of expansion modules, you can use the gray areas for labeling the inputs and
outputs, for example. In this connection, you can enter a delta factor of +8 for the inputs or
+4 for the outputs if the LOGO! Base Module already has 8 inputs or 4 outputs.

2.3

Wiring LOGO!
Wire LOGO! using a screwdriver with a 3-mm blade.
You do not need wire ferrules for the terminals. You can use conductors with cross-sections
of up to the following thicknesses:
● 1 x 2.5 mm2
● 2 x 1.5 mm2 for each second terminal chamber
Tightening torque: 0.4...0.5 Nm or 3...4 in-lbs.
Note
Always cover the terminals after you have completed the installation. To protect LOGO!
adequately from impermissible contact to live parts, comply with local standards.

LOGO!

36

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

2.3.1

Connecting the power supply
The 230-V versions of LOGO! are suitable for operation with rated voltages of 115 V AC/DC
and 240 V AC/DC. The LOGO! 24-V and 12-V versions can be operated with a 24 VDC, 24
V AC or 12 V DC power supply. For information on permissible voltage tolerances, line
frequencies and power consumption, refer to the installation instructions in the Product
Information supplied with your device and to the technical data in Appendix A.
The CM EIB/KNX has been designed as a communication module for the LOGO! controller
and must be supplied with a mains voltage of 12/24 V AC/DC.
The AS Interface bus requires a special AS Interface power supply (30 V DC) that enables
simultaneous transmission of data and power for the encoders via a single line.
The LOGO! TD must be supplied with a voltage of 12 V DC or 24 V AC/DC.
Note
A power failure might cause an additional edge triggering signal at the special functions. The
stored data will be from the last uninterrupted cycle.

Connecting LOGO!
To connect LOGO! to the power supply:

Note
LOGO! is a double-insulated switchgear. You do not need to connect an equipment
grounding conductor.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

37

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Circuit protection with AC voltage
To suppress voltage peaks on the power supply lines, you can install a metal oxide varistor
(MOV). Make sure the operating voltage of the varistor (MOV) used lies at least 20 % above
the rated voltage (for example S10K275).

Circuit protection with DC voltage
To suppress voltage peaks on the power supply lines, please install a protection device.
DEHN (order number: 918 402) is recommended.

2.3.2

Connecting the LOGO! TD power supply
The LOGO! TD must be connected to an external power supply that supplies a voltage of 12
V DC or 24 V AC/DC. A power connector is included with the LOGO! TD.

① Power supply
② Communication interface
The power connection is non-polar. If you connect a DC power supply to the LOGO! TD, you
can connect the positive supply wire or negative supply wire to either the left or right side.
Note
Siemens recommends that you protect the LOGO! TD with a 0.5 A safety fuse on the power
supply.

LOGO!

38

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

2.3.3

Connecting LOGO! inputs

Requirements
At the inputs you connect sensor elements such as: momentary pushbuttons, switches, light
barriers, daylight control switches etc.

Sensor characteristics for LOGO!
LOGO! 12/24RC

LOGO! 24/24o

LOGO! 12/24RCo

LOGO! 24C/24Co

LOGO! DM8
12/24R

LOGO! DM8
24

I3 ... I6

I1,I2,I7,I8

I3 ... I6

I1,I2,I7,I8

I1 ... I8

I1 ... I8

Signal status 0

< 5 V DC

< 5 V DC

< 5 V DC

< 5 V DC

< 5 V DC

< 5 V DC

Input current

< 0.85 mA

< 0.05 mA

< 0.85 mA

< 0.05 mA

< 0.85 mA

< 0.85 mA

Signal status 1

> 8.5 V DC

> 8.5 V DC

> 12 V DC

> 12 V DC

> 8.5 V DC

> 12 V DC

Input current

> 1.5 mA

> 0.1 mA

> 2 mA

> 0.15 mA

> 1.5 mA

> 2 mA

LOGO! 24RC (AC)

LOGO! 24RC (DC)

LOGO! 230 RC (AC)

LOGO! 230 RC (DC)

LOGO! 24RCo (AC)

LOGO! 24RCo (DC)

LOGO! 230 RCo (AC)

LOGO! 230RCo (DC)

LOGO! DM8 24R (AC)

LOGO! DM8 24R (DC)

LOGO! DM8 230R (AC)

LOGO! DM8 230R (DC)

Signal status 0

< 5 V AC

< 5 V DC

< 40 V AC

< 30 V DC

Input current

< 1.0 mA

< 1.0 mA

< 0.03 mA

< 0.03 mA

Signal status 1

> 12 V AC

> 12 V DC

> 79 V AC

> 79 V DC

Input current

> 2.5 mA

> 2.5 mA

> 0.08 mA

> 0.08 mA

LOGO! DM16 24R

LOGO! DM16 24

LOGO! DM16 230R (AC)

LOGO! DM16 230R (DC)

Signal status 0

< 5 V DC

< 5 V DC

< 40 V AC

< 30 V DC

Input current

< 1.0 mA

< 1.0 mA

< 0.05 mA

< 0.05 mA

Signal status 1

> 12 V DC

> 12 V DC

> 79 V AC

> 79 V DC

Input current

> 2.0 mA

> 2.0 mA

> 0.08 mA

> 0.08 mA

Note
The digital inputs of LOGO! 230RC/230RCo and of expansion module DM16 230R are
divided into two groups, each consisting of four inputs. Within the same group, all inputs
must be operated on the same phase. Different phases are only possible between the
groups.
Example: I1 to I4 on phase L1, I5 to I8 on phase L2.
Inputs within the LOGO! DM8 230R may not be connected to different phases.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

39

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Sensor connections
Connecting glow lamps and 2-wire proximity switches (Bero) to LOGO! 230RC/230RCo or
LOGO! DM8 230R (AC) and LOGO! DM16 230R (AC)
The figure below shows how you connect a switch with a glow lamp to LOGO! The current
that flows through the glow lamp allows LOGO! to detect a "1" signal even though the switch
contact is not closed. If, however, you use a switch the glow lamp of which is fitted with a
power supply, this response does not occur.

Take into account the quiescent current of any 2-wire proximity switches used. The level of
the quiescent current of some 2-wire proximity switches is high enough to trigger a logical "1"
signal at the LOGO! input. You should therefore compare the quiescent current of the
proximity switches with the technical data of inputs (Page 245).
Remedy
To suppress this response, use an X capacitor rated at 100 nF and 2.5 kV. In a destructive
situation, this type of capacitor safely disconnects. You must choose the voltage level for
which the capacitor is rated such that it is not destroyed in the case of overvoltage!
At 230 V AC, the voltage between N and an input I(n) must not be greater than 40 V to
guarantee a "0" signal. You can connect approximately ten glow lamps to the capacitor.

Restrictions
Signal status transitions 0 → 1 / 1 → 0:
After a 0 to 1 or 1 to 0 transition, the signal must remain constant at the input at least for the
duration of one program cycle, so that LOGO! can detect the new signal status.
The program execution time is determined by the size of the circuit program. The appendix
"Determining the cycle time (Page 275)" contains a benchmark test routine that you can use
to determine the current scan cycle time.

LOGO!

40

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Special features of LOGO! 12/24RC/RCo, LOGO! 24/24o and LOGO! 24C/24Co
Fast digital inputs: I3, I4, I5 and I6:
These versions are also equipped with fast digital inputs (up/down counters, threshold
triggers). The restrictions mentioned earlier do not apply to these fast digital inputs.
Note
The fast digital inputs I3, I4, I5 and I6 are the same as in the previous versions 0BA0 to
0BA5; therefore, a circuit program that is written in these versions can be transferred to the
new 0BA6 devices with the programming software LOGO!Soft Comfort, without any changes
to these features. In contrast to this, you need to modify circuit programs written for a
LOGO!...L version (fast digital inputs I11-I12). The fast digital inputs have increased from 2
kHz to 5 kHz with the 0BA6 series.
Expansion modules do not have fast digital inputs.

Analog inputs: I1 and I2, I7 and I8:
The inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 of LOGO! versions 12/24RC/RCo and
24C/24Co can be used as either digital inputs or analog inputs. The input mode is defined in
the LOGO! circuit program.
The inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 provide digital inputs, and the inputs AI3, AI4, AI1 and AI2 provide
analog inputs, as described in the topic "Constants and connectors - Co (Page 103)". AI3
corresponds to the input terminal I1; AI4 corresponds to I2; AI1 corresponds to I7; AI2
corresponds to I8. The use of AI3 and AI4 is optional. You configure your LOGO! to use
either two or four analog inputs as described in topic "Setting the number of AIs in the
LOGO! Basic (Page 225)" in Section 5.2.4.
When using inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 as analog inputs, only the range from 0 to 10 V DC is
available.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

41

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Connecting a potentiometer to inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8
To allow you to achieve 10 V as the maximum value when you completely turn the
potentiometer once, you must connect a series resistor on the potentiometer's input side
regardless of the input voltage (see figure below).
We suggest the following sizes of potentiometers and associated series resistors:
Voltage

Potentiometer

Series Resistor

12 V

5 kΩ

-

24 V

5kΩ

6.6 k Ω

When using a potentiometer and 10 V input voltage as the maximum value, you must ensure
that with a connected input voltage of 24 V, 14 V must release via the series resistor so that
a maximum of 10 V are supplied when you turn the potentiometer one full rotation. With a
voltage of 12 V, this can be neglected.
Note
The LOGO! AM2 expansion module provides additional analog inputs. The LOGO! AM2
PT100 expansion module provides PT100 inputs.
Always use twisted and shielded cables for analog signals, and keep these as short as
possible.

Sensor connections
To connect sensors to LOGO! :

LOGO! 12/24 ....

LOGO!

42

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

LOGO! 230 ....

WARNING
Current safety regulations (VDE 0110, ... and IEC 61131-2, ... as well as cULus) do not
permit the connection of different phases to an AC input group (I1 to I4 or I5 to I8) or to the
inputs of a digital module.

LOGO! AM2

The illustration above shows an example of four-wire current measurement and two-wire
voltage measurement.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

43

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Connecting a two-wire sensor to the LOGO! AM2
Wire up the two-wire sensor's connecting wires as follows:
1. Connect the sensor's output to connection U (0 ... 10 V voltage measurement) or to
connection I (0/4 ... 20 mA current measurement) of the AM2 module.
2. Connect the plus connector on the sensor to the 24 V supply voltage (L+).
3. Connect the ground connection of the current output M (on the right side of the sensor, as
shown in the figure above) to the corresponding M input (M1 or M2) on the AM2 module.

LOGO! AM2 PT100
You can connect a maximum of two 2-wire or 3-wire PT100 sensors or one 2-wire plus one
3-wire PT100 sensor to the module. Note that the sensor type supported by the module is
only PT100 with the default temperature coefficient of α= 0.003850.
For a 2-wire connection, you need to short-circuit terminals M1+ and IC1 or M2+ and IC2.
Errors caused by the ohmic resistance of the measuring line are not compensated for this
type of connection. A line resistance of 1 Ω is proportional to measuring error of +2.5 °C.
A 3-wire technique suppresses the influence of the cable length (ohmic resistance) on the
result of the measurement.

LOGO! AM2 RTD
You can connect a maximum of two PT100 sensors or two PT1000 or one PT100 plus one
PT1000 sensor in a 2-wire or 3-wire connection or in a mixed use of 2-wire and 3-wire
connection to the module. Note that the sensor type supported by the module is only PT100
or PT1000 with the default temperature coefficient of α= 0.003850.
For a 2-wire connection, you need to short-circuit terminals M1+ and IC1 or M2+ and IC2.
Errors caused by the ohmic resistance of the measuring line are not compensated for this
type of connection. If a PT100 sensor is connected, a line resistance of 1 Ω is proportional to
measuring error of +2.5 °C; if a PT1000 sensor is connected, a line resistance of 1 Ω is
proportional to measuring error of +0.25 °C.
A 3-wire technique suppresses the influence of the cable length (ohmic resistance) on the
result of the measurement.
LOGO!

44

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Note
Fluctuating analog values are due to screening on the connecting wire from the analog
valuator device to the analog AM2 / AM2 PT100 / AM2 RTD LOGO! expansion module
(encoder wire) that has either been mounted incorrectly or not at all.
To avoid fluctuating analog values when using these expansion modules, proceed as
follows:
• Use only shielded encoder wires.
• Shorten the encoder wire as much a possible. The encodeer wire must not be more than
10 meters long.
• Clamp the encoder wire on one side only and clamp it only to the PE terminal on the AM2
/ AM2 PT100 / AM2 AQ / AM2 RTD expansion module.
• Connect ground on the encoder supply to the PE terminal on the expansion module.
• Avoid operating the LOGO! AM2 PT100 or LOGO! AM2 RTD expansion module with a
power supply that is not grounded (potential-free). If you cannot avoid this, connect the
negative output/ground output on the power supply to the shielding on the resistance
thermometer's measuring wires.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

45

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

2.3.4

Connecting outputs

LOGO! ...R...
The LOGO! ...R... version is equipped with relay outputs. The potential of the relay contacts
is isolated from the power supply and the inputs.

Requirements for relay outputs
You can connect various loads to the outputs; e.g., lamps, fluorescent lamps, motors,
contactor relays, etc. For information on the properties required for the loads connected to
LOGO! ...R..., refer to the technical data (Page 245).

Connecting
This is how you connect the load to LOGO! ...R... :

LOGO! with solid-state outputs
LOGO! versions with solid-state outputs can be identified by the fact that the letter R is
missing from their type name. The outputs are short circuit-proof and overload-proof. An
auxiliary load voltage supply is not necessary, because LOGO! supplies the load voltage.

Requirements for solid-state outputs
The load connected to LOGO! must have the following characteristics:
● The maximum switched current is 0.3 A per output.

LOGO!

46

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

Connecting
This is how you connect the load to a LOGO! with solid-state outputs:

LOGO! AM2 AQ

①
②

Earth
DIN rail

The illustration above shows an example of how to connect the voltage or current load.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

47

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

2.3.5

Connecting the EIB bus
The connection is carried out via the two-pole screw terminal (+ and -).

Only the red-black core pair is used, the white-yellow core pair is not connected.
Press the button "Prog ↓" to switch the CM EIB/KNX to programming mode.

Note
The button "Prog ↓ " should not be pressed too firmly.
If the bus connection is OK, the LED lights up green.
In programming mode, the LED lights up orange.

Networking on the EIB bus
The CM EIB/KNX takes over the communication between LOGO! and EIB and makes
communication available via EIB inputs/outputs.
The application of the CM EIB/KNX fills the complete LOGO! process image; that is, inputs
or outputs which are not occupied on LOGO! can be occupied on the EIB.

Note
For detailed information about the networking of LOGO! on the EIB bus please refer to the
LOGO! CM EIB/KNX documentation, in particular the Micro Automation Set 8.

LOGO!

48

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

2.3.6

Connecting the AS interface bus
To set the address of the module on the AS interface bus, you need an addressing unit.
Valid addresses are in the range of 1 to 31. Use each address once only.
You can set the address on the AS interface bus before or after installation.
If the installed module is addressed via the address socket, the AS-Interface voltage must be
disconnected beforehand. This is necessary for safety reasons.

Networking on the AS interface bus
To make the connection to the AS interface bus, you need a communications-capable
LOGO! variant:
● LOGO! Base Module + CM AS-I.
To be able to send data across the AS interface bus to LOGO! and to receive data from it in
the same way, you also need:
● an AS interface power supply and
● an AS interface master (e.g. an S7-200 with a CP243-2 or a DP/AS-I Link 20 E).
LOGO! can only be accepted as a slave on the AS interface bus. This means that it is not
possible to directly exchange data between two LOGO! devices. Data is always exchanged
across the AS interface master.

WARNING
The AS-Interface and LOGO! systems must never be connected together electrically!
Use safe isolation according to IEC 61131-2, EN 50178, UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 42.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

49

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!
Logic Assignments
LOGO! system

AS Interface system

Inputs

Output data bits

In

DQ1

In+1

DQ2

In+2

DQ3

In+3

DQ4

Outputs

Input data bits

Qn

DI1

Qn+1

DI2

Qn+2

DI3

Qn+3

DI4

"n" depends on the plug-in position of the expansion module relative to the LOGO! Base
Module. It indicates the number of the input or output in LOGO! program code.

Note
Ensure that there is enough space for the inputs/outputs of the AS interface in the LOGO!'s
address space. If you are already using more than 12 physical outputs or more than 20
physical inputs, it is no longer possible to operate the CM AS interface!
For detailed information about the networking of LOGO! on the AS interface bus please refer
to the LOGO! CM AS Interface documentation, in particular the Micro Automation Sets 7 and
16.

LOGO!

50

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.3 Wiring LOGO!

2.3.7

Connecting modems
The LOGO! 0BA6 device series supports a modem connection between a PC and LOGO!
0BA6 Base Module. You can use modems to download and upload circuit programs
between LOGO!Soft Comfort and LOGO! devices. Configuration of the modem connection is
only possible with LOGO!Soft Comfort V6.1 or later.

①
②

PC (desktop or laptop)

③

PSTN (Public Switched Telephone
Network)

④
⑤
⑥

Local modem (Recommended:
INSYS Modem)

Remote modem (Recommended:
INSYS Modem)
LOGO! Base Module

⑦
⑧

Standard RJ11 telephone line

⑨

Cable connector, with the visible text
"MODEM" on each side

⑩
⑪

LOGO! modem cable (length: 0.5 m)

Cable connector, with the visible text "PC
CABLE" on each side
LOGO! PC cable

Standard RS232 cable (9-pin)

For the detailed description of modem configuration, see the LOGO!Soft Comfort V6.1 online
help.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

51

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.4 Putting into operation
For the detailed description of the LOGO! modem cable, see the Product Information
supplied with your LOGO! modem cable.
Note
The modems used must fulfill the following requirements:
Ability to transmit 11-bit bytes (8 data bits, 1 stop bit, 1 even parity bit)
Ability to supply standard AT commands or commands that function as standard AT
commands
The modem connected with the LOGO! modem cable must be able to supply at least 5 mA
current through Pin 1 of its RS232 interface.

2.4

Putting into operation

2.4.1

Switching the LOGO!/Power On
LOGO! does not have a power switch. The reaction of LOGO! during startup depends on the
following:
● Whether a circuit program is stored in LOGO!
● Whether a memory card or combined memory/battery card is inserted
● Whether this is a LOGO! version without display unit (LOGO!...o)
● The status of LOGO! at the time of power failure.
To ensure that the expansion module on LOGO! changes to RUN mode, check the following:
● Has the sliding contact between LOGO! and the expansion module snapped into place
properly?
● Is the power supply connected to the expansion module?
● In addition, always ensure that you switch on the power supply to the expansion module
first before activating the power supply to the LOGO! Base Module (or activate both
power supplies at the same time); if you do not do this, the system does not detect the
expansion module when you start up the LOGO! Base Module.
The following illustration shows all possible reactions of LOGO!:

LOGO!

52

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.4 Putting into operation

You can also memorize four simple rules for starting LOGO! :
1. If neither LOGO! nor the inserted memory card or combined memory/battery card
contains a circuit program, the LOGO! Basic reports: 'No Program / Press ESC'.
2. A circuit program on the memory card or combined memory/battery card is automatically
copied to LOGO!. The circuit program in LOGO! is overwritten.
3. If there is a circuit program in LOGO! or on the memory card or combined memory/battery
card, LOGO! adopts the operational state it had prior to POWER-OFF. Versions without
display unit (LOGO!...o) automatically change from STOP to RUN (LED changes from red
to green).
4. If you have enabled retentivity for at least one function, or a function is permanently
retentive, the current values are retained at POWER-OFF.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

53

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.4 Putting into operation

Note
When a power failure occurs while you are entering a circuit program, the program in LOGO!
will be deleted after power is returned.
Before you modify the circuit program, save a backup copy of your original to a memory
card, a combined memory/battery card, or to a computer (using LOGO!Soft Comfort).

2.4.2

Putting a CM EIB/KNX into operation
1. Bus voltage and supply voltage must be present.
2. Connect the PC to the serial EIB interface.
3. Start software ETS, using ETS2 version 1.2.
4. Configure the application program in ETS2, V 1.2.
5. The application program is loaded into the devices via the EIB interface. The application
program is available on the LOGO! home page (http://www.siemens.de/logo).
6. Click on "Program Physical Address" in ETS.
7. Press the button of the CM EIB/KNX to switch the CM EIB/KNX to programming mode;
LED lights up orange.
Note
The button "Prog ↓ " should not be pressed too firmly.
If the bus connection is OK, the LED lights up green.
In programming mode, the LED lights up orange.
8. If the LED is extinguished, the programming of the physical address has finished. You
can now mark the physical address on the device. Composition of the physical address:
Area / Line / Device XX / XX / XXX
9. The application program can now be run. The device is then ready for operation.
10.If several CM EIB/KNX are installed in an EIB system, steps 1 to 9 must be repeated for
each CM EIB/KNX.
11.Any further details about EIB commissioning can be found in the corresponding
documentation.

LOGO!

54

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.4 Putting into operation

2.4.3

Operating states

LOGO! Base Module operating states
LOGO! Base Modules (LOGO! Basic or LOGO! Pure) have two operating states: STOP and
RUN.
STOP

RUN

•

The display shows: 'No Program' (not
LOGO!...o)

•

Switching LOGO! to programming mode
(not LOGO!...o)

•

LED is red
(only LOGO!...o)

Action of LOGO!:

•

Display: Screen mask for monitoring I/O and
messages (after START in the main menu)
(not LOGO!...o)

•

Switching LOGO! to parameter assignment
mode
(not LOGO!...o)

•

LED is green
(only LOGO!...o)

Action of LOGO!:

•

The input data is not read.

•

LOGO! reads the status of the inputs.

•

The circuit program is not executed.

•

•

The relay contacts are permanently open or
the solid-state outputs are switched off.

LOGO! uses the circuit program to calculate
the status of the outputs.

•

LOGO! switches the relay/solid-state outputs
on or off.

Note
After switching the power on, the system briefly switches through the outputs on the LOGO
24/24o or LOGO! 24C/24Co. With an open circuit, a voltage of > 8 V can occur for up to
approximately 100 ms; when loaded, this time reduces to a matter of microseconds.

LOGO! expansion modules, operating states
LOGO! expansion modules have three operating states: The LED (RUN/STOP) is lit green,
red or orange.
LED (RUN/STOP) is lit
Green (RUN)

Red (STOP)

Orange/Yellow

The expansion module comThe expansion module does not Initialization phase of the exmunicates with the device to the communicate with the device to pansion module
left.
its left.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

55

LOGO! installation and wiring
2.4 Putting into operation

CM AS Interface, communication states
The CM AS Interface has three communication states: The LED is lit green, red or flashes
red/yellow.
LED AS-I is lit
Green

Red

AS Interface communication OK AS Interface communication
failed

Red/Yellow
Slave has address "0".

CM AS Interface, behavior on communication failure
● If the AS Interface voltage fails, communication between the LOGO! system and the
expansion modules, which are arranged to the right of the LOGO! CM AS Interface
expansion module, is interrupted.
Recommendation: Position LOGO! CM AS Interface on the far right side.
● If communication is interrupted, the switching outputs are reset after about 40 to 100 ms.

CM EIB/KNX, communication states
The CM EIB/KNX has three communication states: The LED is lit green, red or orange.
LED BUS is lit
Green
Bus connection OK,
communication OK,
no programming mode

Red
Bus connection interrupted

Orange
Programming mode active and
bus connection OK

CM EIB/KNX, behavior on communication failure
● LOGO! voltage failure
If there is a power failure of LOGO! or a disruption in the communication to the LOGO!
master or to the communication partner on the left side, the outputs are set to 0. The
RUN/STOP LED lights up red after a second.
● LOGO! voltage recovery
LOGO! starts up again, CM EIB/KNX sends the parameterized states.
● CM EIB/KNX voltage failure
All the inputs of the LOGO! master on the EIB are set to 0 by the LOGO! master.
● CM EIB/KNX voltage recovery
All the outputs of the LOGO! master on the EIB are updated. The inputs are read by the
EIB depending on the parameterization.
● Short circuit on the bus or bus interruption
The behavior can be parameterized in the LOGO! configuration window of the application
program in ETS (EIB Tool Software). The red light is set after 5 seconds.
● Bus recovery
The behavior can be parameterized in the LOGO! configuration window.
LOGO!

56

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!

3

Getting started with LOGO!
Programming refers to creating a circuit program from the LOGO! Base Module.
In this chapter you will learn how to use LOGO! to create the LOGO! circuit programs for
your application.
LOGO!Soft Comfort is the LOGO! programming software that you can use on your PC to
quickly and easily create, test, modify, save and print the circuit programs. The topics in this
manual, however, relate only to the creation of circuit programs on the actual LOGO! Base
Module. The programming software LOGO! Soft Comfort contains extensive online help.
Note
LOGO! versions without a display unit; that is, the LOGO! 24o, LOGO! 24Co, LOGO!
12/24RCo, LOGO! 24RCo and LOGO! 230RCo versions, do not have an operator panel and
display unit. They are primarily designed for use in small machine and process equipment
engineering systems for series production.
LOGO!...o versions are not programmed directly on the device. Instead, the circuit program
is downloaded to the device from LOGO!Soft Comfort or from memory cards or combined
memory/battery cards from other LOGO! devices.
LOGO! versions without a display cannot write data to memory cards or combined
memory/battery cards.
See the chapters "LOGO! memory and battery cards (Page 227)", "AUTOHOTSPOT" and
the appendix "LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure") (Page 277)" for more information.
A small example in the first part of this chapter introduces the operating principles of LOGO!:
● You will learn the meaning of two basic terms, namely the connector and the block.
● As the next step, you will create a circuit program based on a simple conventional circuit.
● Lastly, you will enter this program directly in LOGO!
It will take you only a few pages of this manual to store your first executable circuit program
in the LOGO! unit. With suitable hardware (switches etc.), you will then be able to carry out
initial tests.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

57

Programming LOGO!
3.1 Connectors

3.1

Connectors

LOGO! is equipped with inputs and outputs
Example of a configuration with several modules:

Each input is identified by the letter I plus a number. When you look at LOGO! from the front,
you can see the input terminals at the top. Only analog input modules LOGO! AM2, AM2
PT100 and AM2 RTD have the inputs at the bottom.
Each output is identified by the letter Q plus a number (AM2 AQ: AQ plus number). In the
figure, you can see the output terminals at the bottom.
Note
LOGO! can recognize, read and switch the I/O of all expansion modules regardless of their
type. The I/O are presented in the installation order of the modules.
The following I/O and flag blocks are available for creating your circuit program: I1 to I24, AI1
to AI8, Q1 to Q16, AQ1 and AQ2, M1 to M27, and AM1 to AM6. Also available are the shift
register bits S1 to S8, 4 cursor keys: C , C , C and C , four function keys on the
LOGO! TD: F2, F2, F3, and F4 as well as 16 blank outputs X1 to X16. See the "Constants
and connectors (Page 103)" topic for more details.
The following applies to inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8 of LOGO! 12/24.. , LOGO! 24/24o and LOGO!
24C/24Co versions: If you use I1, I2, I7 or I8 in the circuit program, this input signal is digital.
If you use AI3, AI4, AI1, or AI2, the input signal is analog. The numbering of the analog
inputs is significant: AI1 and AI2 corresponded to I7 and I8 on the 0BA5 module. With the
addition of two new analog inputs for the 0BA6 series, these modules optionally use I1 for
AI3 and I2 for AI4. See the graphical representation in the topic on "Maximum setup
(Page 27)". Also note that you can also use I3, I4, I5, and I6 as fast digital inputs.
The illustration above with numbered AI inputs shows the conceptual usage of the inputs, not
the actual physical markings on the module.

LOGO!

58

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.1 Connectors

LOGO!'s connectors
The term connector refers to all connections and states in LOGO! .
The digital I/O status can be '0' or '1'. Status '0' means that the input does not carry a specific
voltage. Status '1' means that the input does carry a specific voltage.
The 'hi', 'lo' and 'x' connectors have been introduced to make it easier for you to create the
circuit program:
'hi' (high) is assigned the status '1',
'lo' (low) is assigned the status '0'.
You do not have to use all of the connectors of a block. The circuit program automatically
assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures proper functioning of the relevant
block. If you prefer to do so, you can identify unused connectors with an 'x'.
For information on the meaning of the term "block", refer to the topic on "Blocks and block
numbers (Page 61)".

LOGO! has the following connectors:
Connectors

Inputs

LOGO! Basic / LOGO! Pure

LOGO! 230RC/RCo,
LOGO! 24RC/RCo

Two groups:
I1...I4 and I5...I8

I9...I24

LOGO! 12/24RC/RCo,

I1,I2, I3-I6, I7, I8
AI3,AI4...AI1, AI2

I9 ... I24

LOGO! 24/24o,

AI1...AI8

none

AI5...AI8

LOGO! 24C/24Co
Outputs

Q1...Q4

lo

Logical '0' signals (off)

hi

Logical '1' signals (on)

x

An existing connection that is not used

Q5...Q16 none

AQ1,
AQ2

DM: Digital module
AM: Analog module

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

59

Programming LOGO!
3.2 EIB inputs/outputs

3.2

EIB inputs/outputs
The application program "20 CO LOGO! 900E02" controls the communication between the
LOGO! and the EIB/KNX bus via the communication module CM EIB/KNX.
By configuring the application program in ETS (EIB Tool Software), the division of the input
and output area of the LOGO! can be defined as a "hardware channel" and as a "virtual
channel" on the EIB/KNX bus.
This characteristic also applies for analog processing.
A communication object is assigned to each "hardware channel" and each "virtual channel"
of LOGO! module.
The real-time clock of LOGO! can be used as a master or slave via the EIB/KNX bus.
The behavior of the communication objects of the communication module CM EIB/KNX,
when the status of the EIB/KNX bus changes, can also be parameterised.
A "virtual input channel" can be used as a bus state; that is, a bus voltage failure can be
reported.
The settings for analog values in LOGO! (Offset, Gain) do not affect the analog values for
the CM EIB/KNX communication module (the output values of the CM EIB/KNX are always
the raw values between 0 and 1000). In this case, you must parameterize customizing in the
ETS.

Functions of the application program
● Specification of the hardware configuration (number of local digital inputs and outputs,
analog inputs)
● Selection of time master or slave
● Use of I24 as a bus status signal
● Behavior on bus voltage failure/recovery
● Input type as monoflop/normal for digital inputs via the EIB/KNX
● Output type as normal/dimmer/edge evaluation for digital outputs via the EIB/KNX
● Data type, adaptation, cyclical sending and sending on change in value for analog
outputs via the EIB/KNX and analog inputs on LOGO!
Any further details about configuring the application program in ETS can be found in the
current application program description.
For the application program see Siemens product database from version J onwards:
● http://www.siemens.de/gamma
● http://www.siemens.de/logo

LOGO!

60

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.3 Blocks and block numbers

3.3

Blocks and block numbers
This chapter shows you how to use LOGO! elements to create complex circuits and how
blocks and I/O are interconnected.
In the topic "From circuit diagram to LOGO! Program (Page 63)" you will learn how to
transform a conventional circuit into a LOGO! circuit program.

Blocks
A block in LOGO! represents a function that is used to convert input information into output
information. Previously you had to wire the individual elements in a control cabinet or
terminal box.
When you create the circuit program, you interconnect the blocks. To do so, simply select
the connection you require from the Co menu. The menu name Co is an abbreviation of the
term "Connector".

Logic operations
The most elementary blocks are the logic operations:
● AND
● OR
● ...

These special functions offer you significantly greater performance:
● Pulse relay
● Up/down counter
● On-delay
● Softkey
● ....
The chapter entitled "LOGO! functions (Page 103)" gives a full list of the LOGO! functions.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

61

Programming LOGO!
3.3 Blocks and block numbers

Block representation on the LOGO! onboard display
The figure below shows a typical view of the LOGO! onboard display. As you can see, it can
show only one block at a time. We have therefore introduced block numbers to help you
check the circuit structure.

Assigning a block number
LOGO! assigns each new block in a circuit program a block number.
LOGO! uses these block numbers to indicate the block interconnections. This means that
these numbers are mainly an aid to your orientation in the circuit program.

The figure above shows you three views of the LOGO! onboard display, which represent the
circuit program. As you can see, LOGO! interconnects the blocks using their numbers.

LOGO!

62

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.4 From circuit diagram to LOGO! program

Advantages of block numbers
You can connect almost any block to an input of the current block by means of its block
number. In this way, you can reuse the interim results of logical or other operations, reduce
programming effort, save memory space and clean up your circuit layout. To do so, however,
you need to know how LOGO! has named the blocks.

Note
An organizational program chart can be a valuable aid when you create the circuit program
because you can enter in this chart all the block numbers that LOGO! assigns.
By using the LOGO!Soft Comfort software to program LOGO!, you can directly create a
function chart of your circuit program. LOGO!Soft Comfort also allows you to assign eightcharacter names to up to 100 blocks, and to view these on the LOGO! onboard display in
parameter assignment mode. See the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO!
(Page 66)".

3.4

From circuit diagram to LOGO! program

View of a circuit diagram
The following illustration shows a typical circuit diagram that represents the circuit logic:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

63

Programming LOGO!
3.4 From circuit diagram to LOGO! program

Creating this circuit with LOGO!
In LOGO! you create a circuit logic by interconnecting blocks and connectors:

Note
Although you have four inputs available for logic operations (Page 107), most of the views
will only show three inputs for reasons of clarity. You program this fourth input and assign
parameters just like you do with the other three inputs.
To create a circuit logic in LOGO!, start at the circuit output.
The output is the load or relay that is to be switched.
Convert the circuit logic into blocks by working through the circuit, starting at the output and
ending at the input:
Step 1: The make contact S3 is interconnected in series to output Q1 and to a further circuit
element. A series connection corresponds with the AND block:

Step 2: S1 and S2 are connected in parallel. A parallel circuit corresponds with the OR block:

LOGO!

64

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.4 From circuit diagram to LOGO! program

Unused inputs
The circuit program automatically assigns the unused connectors a status that ensures
proper functioning of the relevant block. If you like, you can label unused connectors with an
'x' identifier.
In our example we shall use only two inputs of the OR block and two inputs of the AND
block; the relevant unused third and fourth inputs are identified at the connector with an 'x'.
Now connect the I/O to LOGO! .

Wiring
Connect the switches S1 to S3 to the screw terminals of your LOGO! :
● S1 to connector I1 of LOGO!
● S2 to connector I2 of LOGO!
● S3 to connector I3 of LOGO!
The output of the AND block controls the relay at output Q1. The load E1 is connected to
output Q1.

Wiring example
The following figure shows you the wiring, based on a 230 V AC version of LOGO!.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

65

Programming LOGO!
3.5 The four golden rules for operating LOGO!

3.5

The four golden rules for operating LOGO!

Rule 1: Changing the operating mode
● You create the circuit program in programming mode. After power is on, and when the
display shows "No Program / Press ESC", press the ESC key to select programming
mode.
● Timer and parameter values of an existing circuit program can be edited both in
parameter assignment mode and in programming mode. During parameter assignment
LOGO! is in RUN mode; that is, it continues executing the circuit program (see the topic
"Configuring LOGO! (Page 215)"). To work in programming mode, you need to terminate
the circuit program by calling the "Stop" command.
● Select the 'Start' command on the main menu to set RUN mode.
● When the system is in RUN, you can return to parameter assignment mode by pressing
the ESC key.
● When parameter assignment mode is open and you want to return to programming
mode, select the "Stop" command from the parameter assignment menu, and confirm
"Stop Prg" prompt with "Yes". To do so, move the cursor to "Yes" and confirm with OK.
For more details on operating modes, refer to the Appendix topic "LOGO! Menu structure
(Page 279)".
Note
The following applies to 0BA2 device versions and earlier:
• You can open programming mode by pressing

+ +OK.

• You set parameter assignment mode by pressing ESC+OK.

Rule 2: Outputs and inputs
● Always create your circuit program by working from the output to the input.
● You can connect an output to several inputs, but not the same input to several outputs.
● Within the same program path you may not connect an output to an upstream input. For
such internal recursions you should interconnect flags or outputs.

LOGO!

66

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.5 The four golden rules for operating LOGO!

Rule 3: Cursor and cursor movement
The following applies when you edit a circuit program:
● You can move the cursor when it appears in the form of an underscore:
– Press

,

,

or

to move the cursor in the circuit program.

– Press OK to change to "Select connector/block".
– Press ESC to exit programming mode.
● You select a connector/block - when the cursor appears as a solid square:
– Press

or

to select a connector or a block.

– Confirm with OK.
– Press ESC to return to the previous step.

Rule 4: Planning
● Before you start to create a circuit program, you should either first create a design on
paper or program LOGO! directly using LOGO!Soft Comfort.
● LOGO! can only save complete and faultless circuit programs.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

67

Programming LOGO!
3.6 Overview of LOGO! menus

3.6

Overview of LOGO! menus

For more details on these menus, refer to the Appendix topic entitled "LOGO! menu structure
(Page 279)".
The LOGO! TD menus provide configuration settings (Page 283) for the LOGO! TD. These
menus are a subset of the LOGO! menus and are operated in much the same way.

LOGO!

68

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

3.7

Writing and starting the circuit program
After you have designed a circuit, you want to write it to your LOGO!. The small example
below shows how to do this.

3.7.1

Selecting programming mode
You have connected LOGO! to the power supply and switched it on. The display now shows
you the message:

Switch LOGO! to programming mode by pressing ESC. This will take you to the main menu
of LOGO!:

The first character in the first line is the ">" cursor. Press and
to move the ">" cursor up
and down. Move it to "Program.." and confirm with OK. LOGO! opens the programming
menu.

Here you can also move the ">" cursor by pressing
and confirm with OK.

and

. Move the ">" cursor to "Edit.."

Move the ">" cursor to "Edit Prg" (for editing the circuit program) and confirm with OK.
LOGO! now shows you the first output:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

69

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

You are now in programming mode. Press
edit your circuit program.

and

to select the other outputs. Now start to

Note
Because we have not yet saved a password for the circuit program in LOGO!, you can
directly enter editing mode. When you select "Edit" after you have saved a passwordprotected circuit prgram, you are prompted to enter a password and to confirm it with OK.
You can only edit the program after you have entered the correct password (Page 76).

3.7.2

The first circuit program
Let us now take a look at the following parallel circuit consisting of two switches.

Circuit diagram
The corresponding circuit diagram:

Translated into a LOGO! circuit program this means: Relay K1 is (at output Q1) is controlled
by means of an OR block.

Circuit program
S1 is connected to the I1 and S2 to the I2 input connector of the OR block.
The corresponding layout of the circuit program in LOGO!:

LOGO!

70

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

Wiring
The corresponding wiring:

S1 switches input I1, while S2 switches input I2. The load is connected to the relay Q1.

3.7.3

Circuit program input
Let us now write the circuit program, starting at the output and working towards the input.
LOGO! initially shows the output:

You will see an underscore below the Q in Q1, which is the cursor. The cursor indicates your
current position in the circuit program. You can move the cursor by pressing the , , and
keys. Now press the
key. The cursor moves to the left.

At this point you enter only the first (OR) block. Press OK to select editing mode.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

71

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

The cursor no longer appears in the form of an underscore; but instead as a flashing solid
square. LOGO! offers you various options here.
Select GF (basic functions) by pressing the
key until GF appears, and confirm with OK.
LOGO! now shows the first block from the list of basic functions:

Now press

or

until the OR block appears on the display:

Press OK to confirm your entries and exit the dialog.

You have now entered the first block. Each new block is automatically assigned a block
number. The only thing left to do is interconnect the block inputs. This is how it is done:
Press OK.

Select the Co list: Press OK

LOGO!

72

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

The first element of the Co list is the "Input 1" character, namely "I1".
Note
Press
to go to the start of the Co list: I1, I2 ... to lo. Press
lo, hi, ... to I1.

to go to the end of the Co list:

Inputs F1, F2, F3, and F4 are new as of the 0BA6 device series. They correspond to the four
function keys on the optional LOGO! TD.

Press OK. I1 is now connected to the input of the OR block. The cursor jumps to the next
input of the OR block.

Now you connect input I2 to the input of the OR block:
1. Switch to editing mode: Press OK
2. Select the Co list: Press

or

3. Confirm the Co list with: Press OK
4. Select I2: Press

or

5. Apply I2: Press OK
I2 is now connected to the input of the OR block:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

73

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program
We do not need the last two inputs of the OR block for this circuit program. You can mark the
unused inputs with an 'x'. Enter the 'x' character twice:
1. Switch to editing mode: Press OK
2. Select the Co list: Press

or

3. Accept the Co list: Press OK
4. Select 'x': Press

or

5. Apply x: Press OK

Note
You can invert individual inputs of the basic and special functions; that is, if an input
carries a logical "1" signal, the circuit program will output a logical "0". On the other hand,
a logical "0" is inverted into a logical "1" signal.
To invert an input, move the cursor to the relevant position, e.g.:

Confirm with OK.
Now press

or

to invert this input:

Next, press ESC.

You can review your first circuit program by pressing
circuit program.

or

to move the cursor through the

LOGO!

74

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program
We shall now exit circuit programming mode. To return to the programming menu: Press
ESC
Note
LOGO! has now saved your circuit program to nonvolatile memory. The circuit program
remains in the LOGO! memory until you explicitly delete it.
You can save the actual values of special functions in the case of a power outage assuming
that these functions support the "Retentive" parameter and that the necessary program
memory is available. The Retentive parameter is deactivated when you insert a function; to
use it, you must enable this option.

3.7.4

Assigning a circuit program name
You can assign your circuit program a name that consists of up to 16 uppercase/lowercase
letters, numbers and special characters.
In the programming menu:
1. Move the ">" cursor to 'Edit..': Press

or

2. Accept 'Edit': Press OK
3. Move the ">" cursor to 'Edit Name': Press

or

4. Accept 'Edit Name': Press OK
Press
and
to list the alphabet, numbers and special characters, either in ascending or
descending order. You can select any letter, number or character.
To enter a space character, simply move the cursor with
character is the first one in the list.

to the next position. This

Examples:
Press
once to select an " A "
four times to select " { ", etc.
The following character set is available:
A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

a

b

c

d

e

f

g

h

i

j

k

l

m

n

o

p

q

r

s

t

u

v

w

x

y

z

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

!

"

#

$

%

&

'

(

)

*

+

,

-

.

/

:

;

<

=

>

?

@

[

\

]

^

_

'

{

|

}

~

Let us assume you want to name your circuit program "ABC":
1. Select " A": Press
2. Move to the next letter: Press
3. Select " B": Press

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

75

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program
4. Move to the next letter: Press
5. Select " C": Press
6. Confirm the complete name: Press OK
Your circuit program is now named "ABC", and you are returned to the programming menu.
To change the name of your circuit program, proceed in the same way.
Note
You can change the name of the circuit program only in programming mode. You can read
the name both in programming and in parameter assignment mode.

3.7.5

Password
You can protect a circuit program from unauthorized access by assigning it a password.
You can only assign or deactivate a password from a LOGO! Basic or from LOGO!Soft
Comfort. You can only change a password from a LOGO! Basic. If you have assigned a
password, and are using a LOGO! TD (version ES4 or later) together with a LOGO! Base
Module (version ES4 or later), you must enter this password if you want to change LOGO!
from RUN mode to STOP mode from the LOGO! TD. You can not stop the execution of the
circuit program in LOGO! from the LOGO! TD without entering the password.
Note
This password protection function is only available in the LOGO! TD with version number
ES4 or later. This function is only available under the following conditions:
• The version number of both the LOGO! Base Module and the LOGO! TD installed is at
least ES4
• LOGO! is currently in RUN mode and you want to switch to STOP mode
There is only one password that you can assign for LOGO!. You can only assign it from the
LOGO! Basic or from LOGO!Soft Comfort. To change LOGO! from RUN to STOP from the
LOGO! TD, you must enter the password from the LOGO! TD as described below in the
section "Changing LOGO! from RUN to STOP mode from the LOGO! TD".

LOGO!

76

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

Assigning a password from the LOGO! Basic
A password can have a maximum length of 10 characters, and consists only of uppercase
letters. On the LOGO! Basic, you can assign, edit or deactivate the password only from the
"Password" menu.
To enter a password, follow these steps in the programming menu:
1. Move the ">" cursor to 'Password': Press

or

2. Confirm the 'Password': Press OK
Press
or
to move up and down the alphabet to select your letters. Because the
LOGO! Basic only provides uppercase letters for the password, you can quickly access
button:
letters "at the end" of the alphabet (in this example, English) by using the
Press

once to select "Z"

Press

twice to select "Y", etc.

The display appears as follows:

To enter a password of "AA", for example, the procedure is the same as for entering the
name of the circuit program. Select "New" and enter:
3. Select " A": Press
4. Move to the next letter: Press
5. Select " A": Press
The display now appears as follows:

6. Confirm the password: Press OK

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

77

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program
Your circuit program is now protected with the password "AA", and you are returned to the
programming menu.
Note
You can cancel the input of a new password with ESC. In this case, the LOGO! Basic returns
to the programming menu without saving the password.
You can also set your password using LOGO!Soft Comfort. You cannot edit a passwordprotected circuit program in a LOGO! Base Module or upload it to LOGO!Soft Comfort unless
you enter the correct password.
To allow you to create and edit a circuit program for a protected module (Card), you first
need to assign a password to this new program (Page 229).

Changing the password from the LOGO! Basic
You must know the current password in order to change it. From the programming menu,
follow these steps to change the password:
1. Move the '>' cursor to 'Password': Press

or

2. Confirm the 'Password': Press OK
Select "Old" and enter your old password (in our case: 'AA') by repeating steps 3 through
6 as described earlier.
The display now shows:

Now you can select "New" to enter the new password, e.g. "ZZ":
3. Select "Z": Press
4. Move to the next letter: Press
5. Select "Z": Press
The display now shows:

6. Confirm your new password: Press OK
Your new password "ZZ" is now set, and you are returned to the programming menu.

LOGO!

78

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

Deactivating the password from the LOGO! Basic
To deactivate the password to allow, for example, another user to edit your circuit program,
you must know your current password (in our example "ZZ"), the same as if you were
changing it.
To deactivate the password, follow these steps in the programming menu:
1. Move the '>' cursor to 'Password': Press

or

2. Confirm the 'Password': Press OK
Select "Old" and enter your current password as described in steps 3 to 5. Confirm your
entries with OK.
The display shows:

Clear the password by leaving the input box blank:
3. Confirm the "blank" password: Press OK
The password is "cleared", and LOGO! returns to the programming menu.
Note
This action disables the password prompt, and thus permits access without a password.
Leave the password deactivated for quicker progress through the remaining exercises and
examples.

Password: Wrong Password!
If you enter the wrong password and confirm the input with OK, the LOGO! Basic does not
open editing mode, but returns to the programming menu. This repeats itself over and over
again until you enter the correct password.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

79

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

Changing LOGO! from RUN to STOP mode from the LOGO! TD
A change from RUN mode to STOP mode from the LOGO! TD requires password entry if
one is assigned. You must know the existing password if one is assigned. If there is no
password assigned on the LOGO! Base Module, the LOGO! TD will not prompt you for
password entry.
To change LOGO! from RUN mode to STOP mode from the LOGO! TD when LOGO! is
password-protected, follow these steps:
1. On the LOGO! TD, press ESC to switch LOGO! from RUN mode to STOP mode. LOGO!
TD shows the following menu:

2. Press OK. The LOGO! TD shows you the following display:

3. Press
to move the cursor to "Yes", and press OK. Enter the correct password (in this
case: "ZZ"). If you enter an incorrect password, the LOGO! TD returns to the display in
Step 1.

4. Press OK to exit the password entry screen form. The LOGO! TD opens the main menu:

LOGO! changes to STOP mode.
Note
Whenever the LOGO! TD is shut down, the password is reset. The next time you start it and
access this password-protected function (RUN to STOP), you will be prompted for password
entry on the LOGO! TD.
If the password entry screen form (as shown in Step 3) has stayed for more than one minute
since you pressed any key on the LOGO! TD, the LOGO! TD automatically returns you to its
main menu (as shown in Step 4).
The LOGO! TD can also change LOGO! from STOP to RUN mode, but no password is
required in this case.

LOGO!

80

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

3.7.6

Switching LOGO! to RUN mode
In the main menu, select RUN to start LOGO!.
1. Return to the main menu: Press ESC
2. Move the '>' cursor to 'Start': Press

or

3. Confirm 'Start': Press OK
LOGO! runs the circuit program and shows the following display:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

81

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

What is meant by: "LOGO! is in RUN"?
In RUN mode, LOGO! executes the circuit program. To do so, LOGO! first reads the status
at the inputs, determines the status of the outputs by means of the user program, and
switches these on or off according to your settings.
This is how LOGO! indicates the I/O status:

LOGO!

82

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

Status indication on the display

3.7.7

Second circuit program
Up to this point, you have successfully created your first circuit and assigned it a name and,
if desired, a password. In this section we will show you how to modify existing circuit
programs and how to use the special functions.
Using this second circuit program, we will show you how to:
● Add a block to an existing circuit program.
● Select a block for a special function.
● Assign parameters.

Modifying circuits
We shall use the first circuit program as a basis for the second, with some slight
modifications.
First of all take a look at the circuit diagram for the second circuit program:

This is the circuit program layout in LOGO!:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

83

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

You can see the OR block and the output relay Q1 we have already used in the first circuit
program. The only difference is the new off-delay block.

Editing the circuit program
Switch LOGO! to programming mode.
As a reminder:
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode
(in RUN: Press ESC to enter the parameter assignment mode. Select the 'Stop'
command, confirm with OK, then move the '>' cursor to 'Yes', and once again confirm
with OK). For additional details, see the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO!
(Page 66)".
2. On the main menu, select "Program"
3. On the Programming menu, select "Edit", confirm with OK. Next, select "Edit Prg" and
confirm with OK.
If required, enter your password at the prompt and confirm with OK.
You can now modify the current circuit program.

Adding a block to a circuit program
Move the cursor to the B in B1 (B1 is the number of the OR block):

We now insert the new block at this position.
Confirm with OK.

Press

to select the SF list:

LOGO!

84

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

Press OK.
The block of the first special function is shown:

Select your block (off-delay, see the next figure), and then press OK:

The B1 block previously connected to Q1 is automatically connected to the uppermost input
of the new block. Note that you can only interconnect digital inputs with digital outputs or
analog inputs with analog outputs. The 'old' block will otherwise be lost.
The off-delay block has three inputs. At the top is the trigger input (Trg) you use to start the
off-delay time. In our example, the OR block B1 triggers the off-delay. You reset the time and
the output with a signal at the reset input. Set the off-delay time at parameter T of the input
Par.
In our example we do not use the reset input of the off-delay function, and we identify it with
an 'x' connector.

Assigning block parameters
Now you set the off-delay time T:
1. Move the cursor to Par, if it not already at this position: Press

or

2. Switch to editing mode: Press OK
LOGO! shows the parameters in the parameter assignment window:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

85

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

To change the time value:
● Press

and

to position the cursor.

● Press

and

to modify the value at the relevant position.

● Confirm your entries with OK.

Setting the time
Set the time T = 12:00 minutes:
1. Move the cursor to the first digit: Press
2. Select the digit '1': Press

or

or

3. Shift the cursor to the second digit: Press
4. Select digit '2': Press

or

or

5. Move the cursor to the unit: Press

or

6. Select the timebase 'm' (for minutes): Press

or

Showing/hiding parameters - the parameter protection mode
If you want to show/hide the parameter and allow/prevent its modification in parameter
assignment mode:
1. Move the cursor to the protection mode: Press
2. Select the protection mode: Press

or

or

The display should now show:

3. Confirm your entries with: OK

LOGO!

86

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

Enabling/disabling retentivity
To decide whether you want to retain your current data after a power failure or not:
1. Move the cursor to the retentivity setting: Press
2. Select the retentivity setting: Press

or

or

The display now shows:

3. Confirm your entries with OK
Note
For further information on the protection mode, refer to the topic "Parameter protection
(Page 117)".
For further information on retentivity, refer to the topic "Retentivity (Page 116)".
You can modify the protection mode and retentivity setting only in programming mode.
This is not possible in parameter assignment mode.
In this manual, the protection mode ("+" or "-") and retentivity ("R" or "/") settings are only
shown in the displays where these can actually be changed.

Verification of the circuit program
This program branch for Q1 is now completed. LOGO! shows you the output Q1. You can
once again view the circuit program on the display. Use the keys to browse the circuit
or
to move from block to block, and
to move between the
program; that is, press
inputs at a block.

Closing the programming mode
Although you were shown how to exit the programming mode when you created your first
circuit program, here is a reminder:
1. Return to the programming menu: Press ESC
2. Return to the main menu: Press ESC
3. Move the '>' cursor to 'Start': Press

or

4. Confirm 'Start': Press OK
LOGO! is back in RUN mode:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

87

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

3.7.8

Deleting a block
Let us assume you want to delete the block B2 from your circuit program and connect B1
directly to Q1.

Proceed as follows:
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode
(as a reminder, refer to the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO!" (Page 66)).
2. Select 'Edit': Press

or

3. Confirm 'Edit': Press OK
(If required, enter your password and confirm with OK.)
4. Select 'Edit Prg': Press

or

5. Confirm 'Edit Prg': Press OK
6. Move the cursor to B2, the input of Q1: Press

7. Confirm with OK.
8. Now replace block B2 with block B1 at output Q1. The procedure:
– Select the BNlist: Press

or

– Accept the BN list: Press OK
– Select 'B1': Press

or

– Apply 'B1': Press OK
Result: Block B2 is deleted, because it is no longer used in the circuit. Block B1 has replaced
B2 directly at the output.

LOGO!

88

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

3.7.9

Deleting block groups
Let us assume you want to delete the blocks B1 and B2 from the following circuit program
(corresponds with the circuit program in the "Second circuit program (Page 83)" topic.

Proceed as follows:
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode
(as a reminder, refer to the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO! (Page 66)").
2. To select 'Edit': Press

or

3. To confirm 'Edit': Press OK
(If required, enter your password and confirm with OK.)
4. To select 'Edit Prg': Press

or

5. To confirm 'Edit Prg': Press OK
6. To move the cursor to the input of Q1; that is, to B2, press

:

7. Confirm with OK.
8. Now set the connector 'x' at output Q1 instead of block B2. To do so:
– Select the Colist: Press

or

– Accept the Co list: Press OK
– Select 'x': Press

or

– Apply 'x': Press OK
Result: LOGO! deletes block B2 because it is no longer used in the circuit. LOGO! also
deletes all blocks that connect to B2, in this case, block B1.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

89

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

3.7.10

Correcting programming errors
Programming errors can be corrected easily in LOGO!:
● Provided editing mode is not yet closed, you can revert by one step by pressing ESC.
● If you have already configured all inputs, simply reconfigure the faulty input:
1. Move the cursor to the faulty position
2. Change to editing mode. Press OK
3. Enter the correct input circuit
You can only replace a block with a block that has exactly the same number of inputs.
However, you can delete the old block and then insert a new one. You can choose any new
block.

3.7.11

Selecting analog output values for RUN/STOP transition
You can select the analog values that are output at the two analog outputs when LOGO!
changes from RUN mode to STOP mode.
In the programming menu:
1. Move the ">" cursor to 'Edit..': Press

or

2. Select 'Edit': Press OK
3. Move the ">" cursor to 'AQ': Press

or

4. Selectt 'AQ': Press OK
5. Move the ">" cursor to 'AQ in Stop': Press

or

6. Select 'AQ in Stop': Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:

The first two rows show your choices. The bottom row shows the current setting for the
analog output channels. The default setting is 'Last'.
You can select either 'Defined' or 'Last'. 'Last' means that the analog output values are
held at their last value and 'Defined' means that the analog output values are set to
specific values. When LOGO! changes from RUN mode to STOP mode, the values of the
analog outputs change as well, depending on the setting.
7. Select the desired output setting: Press

or

.

8. Confirm your entry: Press OK

LOGO!

90

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

Defining a specific analog output value
To output a specific analog value at the two analog outputs:
1. Move the '>' cursor to 'Defined': Press

or

2. Confirm 'Defined': Press OK
The display shows:

3. Enter a specific output value for each of the two analog outputs.
4. To confirm your entry: Press OK

3.7.12

Defining the type of analog outputs
Analog outputs can be either 0..10V/0..20mA, which is the default, or 4..20mA.
To define the type of analog outputs, follow these steps starting from the programming
menu:
1. Move the ">" cursor to 'Edit..': Press

or

2. Select 'Edit': Press OK
3. Move the ">" cursor to 'AQ': Press

or

4. Select 'AQ': Press OK
5. Move the ">" cursor to 'AQ type': Press

or

6. Select 'AQ type': Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display, for example:

The defined type for each analog channel is shown. To change the type, continue as
follows
7. Move to the AQ
that you want to change. Press

or

8. Select either default (0..10V/0..20mA)
or 4..20mA. Press
or
9. Confirm your selection. Press OK

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

91

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

3.7.13

Deleting the circuit program and password
To delete a circuit program and the password if one is defined:
1. Switch the LOGO! to programming mode (main menu).

2. On the main menu, press

or

to move the '>' cursor to 'Program'. Press OK.

3. On the programming menu, move the '>' cursor to 'Clear Prg': Press

or

4. Confirm 'Clear Prg': Press OK

To cancel deletion of the circuit program, leave the '>' cursor at 'No' and press OK.
If you are sure that you want to delete the circuit program from memory:
5. Move the '>' cursor to 'Yes': Press

or

6. Press OK.

7. Enter your password.
8. Press OK. The circuit program and the password are deleted.

LOGO!

92

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

3.7.14

Summertime/wintertime conversion
You can enable or disable automatic summertime/wintertime conversion
● in parameter assignment mode by calling the "Set.." menu command
● in programming mode by calling the "Setup" menu command.

To enable/disable automatic S/W Time conversion in programming mode:
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode.
2. You are now in the main menu and want to select the 'Setup' menu command: Press
or
3. Confirm 'Setup': Press OK
4. Move the '>' cursor to 'Clock': Press

or

5. Confirm 'Clock': Press OK
6. Move the '>' cursor to 'S/W Time': Press

or

7. Confirm 'S/W Time': Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:

The current setting of automatic S/W Time conversion is shown on the bottom row. The
default setting is 'Off': disabled.
To enable/disable automatic S/W Time conversion in parameter assignment mode:
If you want to enable/disable automatic S/W Time conversion in parameter assignment
mode, select in the parameter assignment menu 'Set..', then menus 'Clock' and 'S/W Time'.
You can now enable/disable automatic S/W Time conversion.

Enabling summertime/wintertime conversion
You now want to enable this conversion and define or set its parameters:
1. Move the '>' cursor to 'On': Press

or

2. Confirm 'On': Press OK
The display shows:

3. Select the desired conversion: Press

or

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

93

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program
What is shown on the display ?:
● 'EU' represents the start and end of European summertime.
● 'UK' represents the start and end of summertime in the United Kingdom.
● 'US1' represents the start and end of daylight saving time (summertime) in the United
States prior to 2007.
● 'US2' represents the start and end of daylight saving time (summertime) in the United
States in 2007 and later years.
● 'AUS' represents the start and end of Australian summertime.
● 'AUS-TAS' represents the start and end of Australian/ Tasmanian summertime.
● 'NZ' represents the start and end of New Zealand summertime.
● . . : Here you can enter any month, day and time zone difference.
The table below lists the preset conversions:
Start of summertime

End of summertime

Time zone
difference Δ

EU

Last Sunday in March:
02:00→03:00

Last Sunday in October:
03:00→02:00

60 Min.

UK

Last Sunday in March:
01:00→02:00

Last Sunday in October:
02:00→01:00

60 Min.

US1

First Sunday in April:
02:00→03:00

Last Sunday in October:
02:00→01:00

60 Min.

US2

Second Sunday in March:
02:00→03:00

First Sunday in November:
02:00→01:00

60 Min.

AUS

Last Sunday in October:
02:00→03:00

Last Sunday in March:
03:00→02:00

60 Min.

AUSTAS

First Sunday in October:
02:00→03:00

Last Sunday in March:
03:00→02:00

60 Min.

NZ

First Sunday in October:
02:00→03:00

Third Sunday in March:
03:00→02:00

60 Min.

..

Customized month and day;
02:00→02:00 + Time zone difference

Customized month and day; Time User-defined (resolution in
zone difference: 03:00→03:00 minutes)
Time zone difference

Note
You can specify a time zone difference Δ between 0 and 180 minutes.
The US2 selection is only supported in LOGO! devices as of the series 0BA6.
Let us assume you want to enable European summertime/wintertime conversion:
1. Move the '>' cursor to 'EU': Press

or

2. Confirm 'EU': Press OK

LOGO!

94

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program
LOGO! shows the following display:

LOGO! indicates that European S/W Time conversion is enabled.

User-defined parameters
If none of the parameters/conversions apply to your country, you can customize these under
menu item '. .'. To do so:
1. Confirm 'On' once again: Press OK
2. Move the '>' cursor to '. .': Press

or

3. Confirm the menu item '. .' : Press OK
The display shows:

Let us assume you want to configure the following parameters: Start of summertime = 31st
March, end of summertime = 1st November, time difference of 120 minutes.
This is how you can enter your data:
● Press

or

● Press

and

to move the solid square/cursor.
to change the value at the cursor position.

The display shows:

● Confirm all your entries with OK.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

95

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program
You have now customized the summertime/wintertime conversion. The LOGO! onboard
display now shows:

LOGO! indicates that summertime/wintertime conversion is enabled, and that user-defined
parameters ( '..' ) have been set.
Note
To disable summertime/wintertime conversion in this menu, you merely confirm 'Off' with OK.

Note
Summertime/wintertime conversion only functions when LOGO! is operating (in RUN or
STOP status). It does not function when LOGO! is in buffered operation (Page 116).

3.7.15

Synchronization
Time synchronization between LOGO! and a connected communication module EIB/KNX
(version 0AA1 upwards!) can be enabled/disabled
● in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu ("Clock" menu item)
● in programming mode by means of the setup menu ("Clock" menu item).
When synchronization is enabled, LOGO! can receive the time-of-day from a communication
module EIB/KNX (version 0AA1 upwards).
Whether synchronization is enabled or disabled, the time-of-day is always sent to the
expansion modules at power-up, every hour (STOP mode or RUN mode), and when the time
of day is changed (after a 'Set Clock' is executed or after a summertime/wintertime
conversion).
Note
When using a LOGO! Base Module with digital or analog expansion modules, but without
communication module EIB/KNX (version 0AA1 upwards), time synchronization must not be
activated! You must check whether time synchronization is deactivated ('Sync' must be set to
'Off').

LOGO!

96

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.7 Writing and starting the circuit program

To enable/disable synchronization in programming mode:
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode.
2. You are now in the main menu, and want to select 'Setup': Press

or

3. Confirm 'Setup': Press OK
4. Move the '>' cursor to 'Clock': Press

or

5. Confirm 'Clock': Press OK
6. Move the '>' cursor to 'Sync': Press

or

7. Apply 'Sync': Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:

The current setting of the automatic synchronization function is displayed on the bottom row.
The default setting is 'Off'; that is, disabled.
To enable/disable synchronization in parameter assignment mode:
If you want to enable/disable automatic synchronization in parameter assignment mode,
select in the parameter assignment menu 'Set..', then menus 'Clock' and 'Sync'. You can
now enable/disable automatic synchronization.

Enabling synchronization
You want to enable synchronization:
1. Move the '>' cursor to 'On': Press

or

2. Confirm 'On': Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

97

Programming LOGO!
3.8 Memory space and circuit program size

3.8

Memory space and circuit program size
The size of a circuit program in LOGO! is limited by the memory space (memory used by the
blocks).

Memory areas
● Program memory:
LOGO! allows only a limited number of blocks in your circuit program.
The second limitation is based on the maximum number of bytes a circuit program may
contain. The total number of bytes used can be determined by adding up the number of
bytes used for the relevant function blocks.
● Retentive memory (Rem):
In this area, LOGO! stores values which need to be retentive; for example, the hours
counter value. Blocks with optional retentivity use this memory area only if this function is
actually enabled.

Resources available in LOGO!
A circuit program in LOGO! can occupy the following maximum resources:
Bytes

Blocks

REM

3800

200

250

LOGO! monitors memory utilization, and offers only those functions from the lists for which it
can actually provide sufficient memory space.

LOGO!

98

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.8 Memory space and circuit program size

Memory requirements
The table below shows an overview of the memory requirements for the basic and special
function blocks:
Function

Program
memory

Rem
memory*

Basic functions
AND

12

-

AND with edge evaluation

12

-

NAND (not AND)

12

-

NAND with edge evaluation

12

-

OR

12

-

NOR (not OR)

12

-

XOR (exclusive OR)

8

-

NOT (Negation)

4

-

On-delay

8

3

Off-delay

12

3

On-/Off-delay

12

3

Retentive on-delay

12

3

Wiping relay (pulse output)

8

3

Edge triggered wiping relay

16

4

Asynchronous pulse generator

12

3

Random generator

12

-

Stairway lighting switch

12

3

Multiple function switch

16

3

Weekly timer

20

-

Yearly timer

12

-

Up/down counter

28

5

Hours counter

28

9

Threshold trigger

16

-

Analog threshold trigger

16

-

Analog differential trigger

16

-

Analog comparator

24

-

Analog value monitoring

20

-

Analog amplifier

12

-

Special functions
Timers

Counters

Analog

Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)

24

-

Analog math

20

-

Analog math error detection

12

1

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

99

Programming LOGO!
3.8 Memory space and circuit program size

Function
Analog multiplexer

Program
memory
20

Rem
memory*
-

Analog ramp

36

-

PI controller

40

2

Latching relay

8

1

Pulse relay

12

1

Others

Message texts

8

-

Softkey

8

2

Shift register

12

1

*: Bytes in the Rem memory area if retentivity is enabled.

Utilization of memory areas
The system indicates that there is insufficient memory space by not allowing you to add a
further block to your circuit program. LOGO! offers you only the blocks for which it can
provide sufficient memory space. If LOGO! memory space is insufficient to hold any further
blocks you select from a block list, the system will deny access to this list.
If memory space is fully occupied, optimize your circuit program or install a second LOGO!

Calculating memory requirements
When calculating the memory requirements of a circuit, you must always take into account
all individual areas of memory.
Example:

LOGO!

100

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Programming LOGO!
3.8 Memory space and circuit program size

The sample circuit program contains:
Block no.

Function

Memory area
Bytes

Blocks

REM

B1

OR

12

1

-

B2

AND

12

1

-

B3

Weekly timer

20

1

-

B4

On-delay*

8

1

3

B5

Stairway lighting switch

12

1

0

B6

AND

12

1

-

Resources used by the circuit program

76

6

3

Memory space limits in LOGO!

3800

200

250

Still available in LOGO!

3724

194

247

*: Configured with retentivity.
This means that this circuit program fits in LOGO!.

Indication of available memory space
LOGO! shows you the amount of free memory space.
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode
(as a reminder, refer to the topic "The four golden rules for operating LOGO! (Page 66)".
2. Select 'Edit': Press

or

3. Accept 'Edit': Press OK
4. Select 'Memory?': Press

or

5. Accept 'Memory?': Press OK
The display now shows:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

101

Programming LOGO!
3.8 Memory space and circuit program size

LOGO!

102

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions

4

LOGO! provides you with various elements in programming mode, which are organized in
the following lists:
● ↓Co: Connector list (Connector)
● ↓GF: List of the basic functions AND, OR, ...
● ↓SF: List of the special functions
● ↓BN: List of reusable blocks configured in the circuit program

List contents
All lists show the elements available in LOGO! Usually, this includes all connectors, basic
functions, and special functions. The ↓BN list shows all the blocks that you have created in
LOGO!.

If not all is shown
LOGO! does not show all elements if:
● No further blocks may be added.
This is either an indication of insufficient memory space or that the maximum number of
blocks has been reached.
● A specific block's memory space requirement (Page 98) would exceed the space
available in LOGO!

4.1

Constants and connectors - Co
Constants and connectors (Co) represent inputs, outputs, flags and constant voltage levels
(constants).

Inputs:
1) Digital inputs
Digital inputs are identified with an I. The number of the digital inputs (I1, I2, ...) corresponds
to the number of the input connectors of the LOGO! Base Module and of the connected
digital modules, in the order of their installation. The fast digital inputs I3, I4, I5, and I6 of the
LOGO! versions LOGO! 24/24o, LOGO! 24C/24Co, LOGO! 12/24RC and LOGO! 12/24RCo
can be used as fast counters.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

103

LOGO! functions
4.1 Constants and connectors - Co

2) Analog inputs
The LOGO! versions LOGO! 24, LOGO! 24o, LOGO! 24C, LOGO! 24Co, LOGO! 12/24RC
and LOGO! 12/24RCo are equipped with the inputs I1, I2, I7 and I8, which can also be
programmed for use as AI3, AI4, AI1 and AI2 inputs. As described in topic "Setting the
number of AIs in the LOGO! Basic (Page 225)", you can configure these modules to use
either two analog inputs (AI1 and AI2), or all four. Signals at the I1, I2, I7 and I8 inputs are
interpreted as digital values, and those at the AI3, AI4, AI1 and AI2 inputs are interpreted as
analog values. Note that AI3 corresponds to I1 and AI4 corresponds to I2. This numbering
preserves the previous correspondence of AI1 to I7 and AI2 to I8 that was available with the
0BA5 series. The inputs of a connected analog module are numbered according to the
already existing analog inputs. See topic "Maximum setup (Page 27)" for example setups. In
programming mode, when you select the input signal of a special function that takes an
analog input, LOGO! offers the analog inputs AI1...AI8, analog flags AM1...AM6, analog
outputs AQ1 and AQ2, and the block numbers of functions with analog outputs.

Outputs:
1) Digital outputs
Digital outputs are identified by the character Q. The output numbers (Q1, Q2, ... Q16)
correspond with the numbers of the output connectors at the LOGO! Base Module and with
those of the expansion modules, in their order of installation. See the following figure.
There are also 16 blank outputs available. These are identified with an x and cannot be
reused in a circuit program (in contrast to flags, for example). The list shows all programmed
blank outputs, and one blank output which is not yet configured. A blank output, for example,
is useful for the special function "Message texts" (Page 178) , if only the message text is of
significance to a circuit program.

2) Analog outputs
Analog outputs are identified by the letters AQ. Two analog outputs are available, namely
AQ1 and AQ2. An analog output can only be connected with the analog input of a function,
an analog flag AM or an analog output connector.
The following figure shows an example LOGO! configuration and the numbering of the inputs
and outputs for the circuit program.

LOGO!

104

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.1 Constants and connectors - Co

Flag blocks
Flag blocks are identified by the letters M or AM . These are virtual outputs, which output the
value of their inputs. LOGO! provides 27 digital flags M1 ... M27 and 6 analog flags AM1 ...
AM6.

Startup flag
Flag M8 is set in the first cycle of the user program and can thus be used in your circuit
program as a startup flag. This signal is automatically reset after the circuit program has
completed its first cycle.
The M8 flag can be used in all further cycles for setting, deletion and evaluation procedures
in the same way as other flags.

Backlight flags M25 and M26
The M25 flag controls the backlight of the LOGO! onboard display. The M26 flag controls the
backlight of the LOGO! TD.
Note: The backlight lifetime of the LOGO! TD is 20,000 hours.

Message text character set flag M27
The M27 flag selects between the two character sets that LOGO! uses to display message
texts. State 0 corresponds to Character Set 1, and state 1 corresponds to Character Set 2. If
M27=0 (low), only message texts configured for Character Set 1 will display; If M27=1 (high),
only message texts configured for Character Set 2 will display. If you do not include M27 in
the circuit program, message texts display in the character set that you selected from either
the Msg Config menu or from LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Note
The output of the flag always carries the signal of the previous program cycle. This value
does not change within the same program cycle.

Shift register bits
LOGO! provides the shift register bits S1 to S8, which are assigned the read–only attribute in
the circuit program. The content of shift register bits can only be modified by means of the
"Shift register" (Page 191) special function.

Cursor keys
Up to four cursor keys are available to you, namely C , C , C and C
("C" =
"Cursor"). Cursor keys are programmed for the circuit program in the same way as other
inputs. You can set the cursor keys in the corresponding display while the system is in RUN
(Page 81) , and in an active message text (ESC + Key). Cursor keys can save switches and
inputs, and allow operator control of the circuit program. Cursor key inputs from the
LOGO! TD are identical to cursor key inputs from the LOGO! Base Module.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

105

LOGO! functions
4.1 Constants and connectors - Co

LOGO! TD function keys
The LOGO! TD has four function keys that you can use in your circuit program. You program
these keys in the same way as other inputs. Like the cursor keys, you can press these keys
when LOGO! is in RUN mode to affect the behavior of the circuit program, and to save
switches and inputs. They are identified as F1, F2, F3, and F4.

Levels
Voltage levels are designated hi and lo. A constant "1" = hi or "0" = lo status at the block can
be set by means of a permanent voltage level or constant value hi or lo.

Open connectors
Unused block connectors can be identified with an x.

LOGO!

106

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.2 Basic functions list - GF

4.2

Basic functions list - GF
Basic functions represent simple logical elements of Boolean algebra.
You can invert the inputs of individual basic functions, that is, the circuit program inverts a
logical "1" at a relevant input to a logical "0"; if "0" is set at the input, the program sets a
logical "1". See the programming example at Circuit program input (Page 71).
The GF list contains the basic function blocks you can use for your circuit program. The
following basic functions are available:
View in the circuit diagram

View in LOGO!

Name of the basic function
AND (Page 108)

AND with edge evaluation
(Page 109)

NAND (Page 109)
(not AND)

NAND with edge evaluation
(Page 110)

OR (Page 111)

NOR (Page 112)
(not OR)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

107

LOGO! functions
4.2 Basic functions list - GF

View in the circuit diagram

View in LOGO!

Name of the basic function
XOR (Page 113)
(exclusive OR)

NOT (Page 113)
(negation, inverter)

4.2.1

AND

The output of the AND is only 1 if all inputs are 1, i.e. all contacts are closed.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.

AND function logic table
1

2

3

4

Q

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

LOGO!

108

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.2 Basic functions list - GF

4.2.2

AND with edge evaluation

The output of an edge triggered AND is only 1 if all inputs are 1 and if at least one input was
low in the previous cycle.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.

Timing diagram for the AND with edge evaluation

4.2.3

NAND (not AND)

The output of the NAND is only 0 if the status at all inputs is 1, i.e. the contacts are closed.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.

NAND function logic table
1

2

3

4

Q

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

109

LOGO! functions
4.2 Basic functions list - GF

4.2.4

1

2

3

4

Q

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

NAND with edge evaluation

The output status of the NAND with edge evaluation is only 1 if at least one input is 0 and if
all inputs were 1 in the previous cycle.
At an unused block input (x): x = 1.

Timing diagram for the NAND with edge evaluation

LOGO!

110

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.2 Basic functions list - GF

4.2.5

OR

The output status of the OR element is only 1 if at least one input is 1, i.e. at least one of the
contacts is closed.
At an unused block input (x): x = 0.

OR function logic table
1

2

3

4

Q

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

111

LOGO! functions
4.2 Basic functions list - GF

4.2.6

NOR (not OR)

The output status of the NOR is only 1 if all inputs are 0, i.e. if switched off. The NOR output
is set to 0 when one of the inputs is switched on (logical 1 status).
At an unused block input (x): x = 0.

NOR function logic table
1

2

3

4

Q

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

LOGO!

112

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.3 Special Functions

4.2.7

XOR (exclusive OR)

The output status of the XOR is 1 if the inputs are not equivalent.
At an unused block input (x): x = 0.

XOR function logic table

4.2.8

1

2

Q

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

NOT (Negation, Inverter)

The output status is 1 if the input is 0. The NOT block inverts the input status.
Advantage of the NOT block, for example: LOGO! does not require break contacts. You
simply use a make contact and the NOT block to convert these into a break contact.

NOT function logic table
1

Q

0

1

1

0

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

113

LOGO! functions
4.3 Special Functions

4.3

Special Functions
Because of their different input designation, you can see right away that there is a difference
between the special functions and basic functions. Special functions (SFs) contain timer
functions, retentive functions and various parameter assignment options, which allow you to
adapt the circuit program to suit your own requirements.
This section provides you with a brief overview of input designations and with some
particular background information on SFs.

4.3.1

Designation of the inputs

Logical inputs
Here, you will find the description of the connectors you can use to create a logical link to
other blocks or to the inputs of the LOGO! unit.
● S (Set):
A signal at input S sets the output to logical "1".
● R (Reset):
The reset input R takes priority over all other inputs and resets the outputs.
● Trg (Trigger):
This input is used to trigger the start of a function.
● Cnt (Count):
This input is used for counting pulses.
● Fre (Frequency):
Frequency signals to be evaluated are applied to this input.
● Dir (Direction):
This input determines the direction, + or -.
● En (Enable):
This input enables a block function. When this input is "0", other signals to the block will
be ignored.
● Inv (Invert):
A signal at this input inverts the output signal of the block.
● Ral (Reset all):
All internal values are reset.
Note
Unused logical inputs of special functions default to logical "0".

Connector X at SF inputs
SF inputs connected to connector x are set low. That is, the inputs carry a 'lo' signal.

LOGO!

114

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.3 Special Functions

Parameter inputs
At some of the inputs you do not apply any signals. You configure the relevant block values
instead. Examples:
● Par (Parameter):
This input will not be connected. Here, you set the relevant block parameters (times,
on/off thresholds etc.).
● No (Cam):
This input will not be connected. Here, you configure the time patterns.
● P (Priority):
This is an open input. Here, you define priorities and specify whether a message is to be
acknowledged in RUN.

4.3.2

Time response

Parameter T
At some of the SFs it is possible to configure a time value T. When you preset this time, note
that your input values are based on the timebase set:
Timebase

__:__

s (seconds)

seconds : 1/100 seconds

m (minutes)

minutes : seconds

h (hours)

hours : minutes

Accuracy of T
Because of slight tolerances in the characteristics of electronic components, the set time T
can deviate. You can find a detailed description of such deviations in the "On-delay" topic
(Page 123).

Accuracy of the timer (weekly/yearly timer)
To prevent timing inaccuracy of the real-time clock in C versions caused by this deviation,
the timer value is continuously compared with a high-precision timebase and corrected. The
resultant maximum timing inaccuracy is ±5 s/day.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

115

LOGO! functions
4.3 Special Functions

4.3.3

Backup of the real-time clock
Because the internal real–time clock of a LOGO! is backed up, it continues operation after a
power failure. The ambient temperature influences the backup time. At an ambient
temperature of 25°C, the typical backup time is 80 hours.
If there is a power outage of a LOGO! for more than 80 hours, the internal clock responds,
dependent on the equipment series, as shown below:
● Equipment series 0BA0:
On restarting, the clock is set to "Sunday 00:00 1 January". The time starts to run. Due to
this, the system processes the time switches, which trigger actions if necessary.
● Equipment series 0BA1 and later:
On restarting, the clock is set to "Sunday 00:00 1 January". The time is stopped and
flashes. LOGO! is back in the status that it was in before the power outage. In the RUN
status, the system processes the counters that were parameterized with the time above.
The clock is, however, still stopped.
● Equipment series 0BA6:
If you are using the optional LOGO! Battery card, or combined LOGO! Memory/Battery
card, LOGO! can retain the clock time for up to two years. These cards are available for
equipment series 0BA6.

4.3.4

Retentivity
The switching states, counter and time values of many SFs (see the "Special functions list SF (Page 119)" topic) can be set retentive. This means that current data values are retained
after a power failure, and that the block resumes operation at the break point. The timer is
not reset, but resumes operation until the time-to-go has expired, for example.
To enable this response, however, the relevant functions must be set retentive. Two options
are available:
R: The data is retained.
/: Current data is not retained (default). See the section in topic "Second circuit program
(Page 83)" on enabling and disabling retentivity.
The hours counter, weekly timer, yearly timer and PI controller are always retentive.

LOGO!

116

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.3 Special Functions

4.3.5

Parameter protection
In the parameter protection settings, you can determine whether or not the parameters can
be displayed and edited in LOGO! parameter assignment mode. Two options are available:
+: The parameter attribute permits read/write access in parameter assignment mode
(default).
-: The parameter settings are read–/write–protected in parameter assignment mode, and can
be edited only in programming mode. See the parameter protection mode example in the
Second circuit program (Page 83).
Note
Parameter protection covers only the "Set Param" window. If you embed variables of
protected special functions in a message text, the variables are still editable from the
message text. To protect these variables, you must also activate the protection of the
message text.

4.3.6

Calculating the gain and offset of analog values
A sensor is connected to the analog input and converts a process variable into an electrical
signal. This value of signal lies within the typical range of this sensor.
LOGO! always converts the electrical signals at the analog input into digital values from 0 to
1000.
A voltage of 0 to 10 V at input AI is transformed internally into a range of values from 0 to
1000. An input voltage exceeding 10 V is shown as internal value 1000.
Because you cannot always process the range of values from 0 to 1000 as predetermined by
LOGO!, you can multiply the digital values by a gain factor and then shift the zero of the
range of values (offset). This allows you to output an analog value to the LOGO! onboard
display, which is proportional to the actual process variable.
Parameter

Minimum

Maximum

Input voltage (in V)

0

≥ 10

Internal value

0

1000

Gain

-10.00

+10.00

Offset

-10000

+10000

Mathematical rule
Actual value Ax =
(internal value at input Ax • gain) + offset

Gain and offset calculation
The gain and offset is calculated based on the relevant high and low values of the function.
Example 1:
The available thermocouples have the following technical data: -30 to +70 °C, 0 to 10 V DC
(i.e. 0 to 1000 in LOGO!).

Actual value = (internal value • gain) + offset, thus

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

117

LOGO! functions
4.3 Special Functions
-30 = (0 • A) + B, i.e. offset B = -30
+70 = (1000 • A) -30, i.e. gain A = 0.1
Example 2:
A pressure sensor converts a pressure of 1000 mbar into a voltage of 0 V, and a pressure of
5000 mbar into a voltage of 10 V.

Actual value = (internal value • gain) + offset, thus
1000 = (0 • A) + B, i.e. offset B = 1000
5000 = (1000 • A) +1000, i.e. gain A = 4

Example of analog values
Process variable

Voltage (V)

Internal value

Gain

Offset

Value shown (Ax)

-30 °C
0 °C
+70 °C

0
3
10

0
300
1000

0.1
0.1
0.1

-30
-30
-30

-30
0
70

1000 mbar

0

0

4

1000

1000

3700 mbar

6.75

675

4

1000

3700

5000 mbar

10

1000

4

1000

5000

0
5
10

0
500
1000

0.01
0.01
0.01

0
0
0

0
5
10

0
5
10

0
500
1000

1
1
1

0
0
0

0
500
1000

0
5
10

0
500
1000

10
10
10

0
0
0

0
5000
10000

0
5
10

0
500
1000

0.01
0.01
0.01

5
5
5

5
10
15

0
5
10

0
500
1000

1
1
1

500
500
500

500
1000
1500

0
5
10

0
500
1000

1
1
1

-200
-200
-200

-200
300
800

0
10

0
1000

10
10

-10000
-10000

-10000
0

0.02
0.02
0.02
0.02

2
2
2
2

0.01
0.1
1
10

0
0
0
0

0
0
2
20

A sample application is found in the description of the "Analog comparator (Page 165)" SF.
For further information on analog inputs, refer to the Constants and connectors - Co
(Page 103) topic.

LOGO!

118

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4

Special functions list - SF
When you create your circuit program in LOGO!, you find the special function blocks in the
SF list.
You can invert the inputs of SFs individually, that is, the circuit program converts a logical "1"
at the input into a logical "0"; a logical "0" it converts into a logical "1". See the programming
example in topic "Circuit program input (Page 71)".

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

119

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
The table also specifies whether the relevant function can be set retentive (Rem). The
following SFs are available:
View in LOGO!

Name of the special function

Rem

On-delay (Page 123)

REM

Off-delay (Page 126)

REM

On-/Off-delay (Page 127)

REM

Retentive on-delay (Page 129)

REM

Wiping relay (pulse output) (Page 130)

REM

Edge triggered wiping relay (Page 132)

REM

Asynchronous pulse generator (Page 134)

REM

Times

Random generator (Page 135)

Stairway lighting switch (Page 137)

REM

LOGO!

120

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

View in LOGO!

Name of the special function

Rem

Multiple function switch (Page 139)

REM

Weekly timer (Page 141)

Yearly timer (Page 145)

Counter
Up/down counter (Page 151)

REM

Hours counter (Page 154)

REM

Threshold trigger (Page 158)

Analog
Analog threshold trigger (Page 160)

Analog differential trigger (Page 163)

Analog comparator (Page 165)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

121

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

View in LOGO!

Name of the special function

Rem

Analog value monitoring (Page 170)

Analog amplifier (Page 173)

Analog multiplexer (Page 194)

Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) (Page 206)

Analog math (Page 209)

Analog ramp (Page 197)

PI controller (Page 201)

REM

Latching relay (Page 175)

REM

Pulse relay (Page 176)

REM

Miscellaneous

LOGO!

122

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

View in LOGO!

Name of the special function

Rem

Message texts (Page 178)

Softkey (Page 189)

REM

Shift register (Page 191)

REM

Analog math error detection (Page 212)

4.4.1

On-delay

Short description
The output is only set after a configurable on-delay time has expired.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the on-delay
timer.

Parameter

T represents the time after which the output is
switched on (0 to 1 transition of the output signal).
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
R = the status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is switched on when the set time T has expired,
provided Trg is still set.

Parameter T
Note the defaults for parameter T in topic Time response (Page 115).
The time for parameter T can also be preset based on the actual value of another, alreadyconfigured function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax - Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

123

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is adjustable. Please note
the following listing:

Valid ranges of the timebase, if T = parameter
Timebase

max. value

min. resolution

Accuracy

s (seconds)

99:99

10 ms

+ 10 ms

m (minutes)

99:59

1s

+1s

h (hours)

99:59

1 min

+ 1 min

The display in programming mode (example):

Valid ranges of the timebase, if T = Actual value of an already-programmed function
Timebase

max. value

Meaning

Accuracy

ms

99990

Number of ms

+ 10 ms

s

5999

Number of s

+1s

m

5999

Number of min

+ 1 min

The display in programming mode (example):

If the referenced block (B6, in the example) returns a value that lies out of the valid range,
the value is rounded up or down to the next valid value.

LOGO!

124

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameter preset = Actual value of an already-programmed function
How to include the actual value of an already-programmed function:
1. Press

to move the cursor to the equal sign of parameter T.

2. Press
to change the equal sign into an arrow. If it exists, the last referenced block and
its timebase is shown.

3. Press
to move the cursor to the "B" of the shown block, and then press
required block number.
4. Press
to move the cursor to the block's timebase and press
timebase.

to select the

to select the required

The view in parameter assignment mode (example):

Timing diagram

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

125

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Functional description
The time Ta is triggered with a 0 to 1 transition at input Trg (Ta is the current LOGO! time).
If the status of input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the configured time T, the output is
set to 1 on expiration of this time (the output follows the input with on-delay).
The time is reset when the status at input Trg returns to 0 before the time T has expired.
The output is reset to 0 when the signal at input Trg is 0.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.

4.4.2

Off-delay

Short description
When an on-delay is set, the output is reset when the configured time has expired.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

The off-delay timer starts with a negative edge (1 to 0
transition) at input Trg (Trigger)

Input R

A signal at input R resets the on-delay time and the
output.

Parameter

The output switches off (transitions from1 to 0) when
the delay time T expires.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is set with a signal at input Trg. It holds this state
until T has expired.

Parameter T
Note the parameter T defaults specified in topic Time response (Page 115).
The time for parameter T can be based on the actual value of another, already-configured
function. You can use the actual value of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax - Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid timebase ranges and parameter preset, refer to the On-delay
(Page 123) topic.

LOGO!

126

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Timing diagram

Functional description
Output Q is set to hi immediately when the input Trg changes to hi.
The actual time Ta in LOGO! is retriggered at the 1 to 0 transition of Trg. The output remains
set. Output Q is reset to 0 with off-delay when Ta reaches the value configured at T (Ta=T).
The time Ta is retriggered with a one-shot at input Trg.
You can set input R (Reset) to reset the time Ta and the output before Ta has expired.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.

4.4.3

On-/Off-delay

Short description
The on-/off-delay function sets the output after the set on-delay time has expired, and resets
it upon expiration of the off-delay time.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the on-delay time TH.
A negative edge (1 to 0 transition) at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the off-delay time TL.

Parameter

TH is the time after which the output is set hi (output
signal transition 0 to 1).
TL is the time after which the output is reset ( output
signal transition 1 to 0).
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is set when the configured time TH has expired and
Trg is still set. It is reset on expiration of the time TL, if
the trigger Trg has not been set again.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

127

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters TH and TL
Note the preset values for the parameters TH and TL in topic Time response (Page 115).
The on-delay and off-delay times for parameters TH and TL can be based on the actual value
of another, already-configured function. You can use the actual values of the following
functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax - Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid timebase ranges and parameter preset, refer to the On-delay
(Page 123).

Timing diagram

Functional description
The time TH is triggered with a 0 to 1 transition at input Trg.
If the status at input Trg is 1 at least for the duration of the time TH, the output is set to 1 on
expiration of the time TH (the output follows the input with on-delay).
The time is reset when the signal at input Trg is reset to 0 before the time TH has expired.
A 1 to 0 transition at input Trg triggers the time TL.
If the status at input Trg is 0 at least for the duration of the signal TL, the output is set to 0 on
expiration of the time TL (the output follows the input with off-delay).
The time is reset when the signal at input Trg changes to 1 again before the time TL has
expired.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.

LOGO!

128

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.4

Retentive on-delay

Short description
A one-shot at the input triggers a configurable on-delay time. The output is set when this
time has expired.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the on-delay
timer.

Input R

A signal at input R resets the on-delay time and the
output.

Parameter

T represents the on-delay time for the output (output
status transition 0 to 1).
Retentivity:
/ = no retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is set after the time T has expired.

Parameter T
Note the defaults specified in topic Time response (Page 115).
The time for parameter T can be provided by the actual value of another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

129

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Timing diagram

Functional description
The 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg triggers the current time Ta. Output Q is set when Ta =
T. A further signal at input Trg does not influence the time Ta.
The output and the time Ta are reset with the next 1 signal at input R.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.

4.4.5

Wiping relay (pulse output)

Short description
An input signal generates a signal with a configurable period at the output.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the time for the
wiping relay function.

Parameter

The output is switched off after the time T has expired
(output signal transition 1 to 0).
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

A signal at input Trg sets Q. If the input signal = 1,
output Q remains set for the time Ta.

LOGO!

130

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameter T
Note the information on parameter T in topic Time response (Page 115).
The time for parameter T can be provided by the actual value of another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

Timing diagram

Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg sets the output, and triggers a time Ta during which the output
remains set.
Output Q is reset to lo (pulse output) when Ta reaches the value preset at T (Ta = T).
The output is immediately reset if there is a 1 to 0 transition at input Trg before the specified
time has expired.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

131

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.6

Edge triggered wiping relay

Short description
An input pulse generates a preset number of output pulses with a defined pulse/pause ratio
(retriggerable), after a configured delay time has expired.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the times for
the edge triggered wiping relay.

Input R

A signal at input R resets the current time (Ta) and
the output.

Parameter

The interpulse width TL and the pulse width TH are
configurable.
N determines the number of pulse/pause cycles
TL/TH:
Range of values: 1...9
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is set after TL has expired, and reset after TH has
expired.

Parameters TH and TL
Note the information on parameter T in topic Time response (Page 115).
The pulse width TH and the interpulse width TL can be provided by the actual value of
another already-programmed function. You can use the actual values of the following
functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

LOGO!

132

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Timing diagram A

Timing diagram B

Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg triggers the time TL (Time Low). After the time TL has expired,
output Q is set for the duration of TH (Time High).
If there is a further 0 to 1 transition (retriggering pulse) at input Trg before the preset time (TL
+ TH) has expired, Ta is reset and the pulse/pause cycle is restarted.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the time are reset after a power failure.

Setting the Par parameter
View in programming mode (example):

Press

View in parameter assignment mode (example):

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

133

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.7

Asynchronous pulse generator

Short description
The output pulse shape can be modified by reconfiguring the pulse/pause ratio.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

You can use input EN to set and reset the asynchronous pulse generator.

Input INV

Input INV can be used to invert the output signal of
the active asynchronous pulse generator.

Parameter

You can configure the pulse width TH and the interpulse width TL.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is set and reset cyclically according to the
pulse/pause ratio TH and TL.

Parameters TH and TL
Note the information on parameter T in topic Time response (Page 115)
The pulse width TH and the interpulse width TL can be provided by the actual value of
another already-programmed function. You can use the actual values of the following
functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

Timing diagram

LOGO!

134

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Functional description
You can configure the pulse/interpulse width at the TH (Time High) and TL (Time Low)
parameters.
Input Inv can be used to invert the output signal, provided the block is enabled with a signal
at input EN.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.

4.4.8

Random generator

Short description
The output of the random generator is set or reset within a configured time.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

A positive edge ( 0 to 1 transition) at input En (Enable) triggers the on-delay time of the random generator.
A negative edge ( 1 to 0 transition) at input En (Enable) triggers the off-delay time of the random generator.

Parameter

The on-delay is set at random to a value between 0 s
and TH.
The off-delay is set at random to a value between 0 s
and TL.

Output Q

Output Q is set when the on-delay has expired and if
En is still set. It is reset when the off-delay has expired, provided En was not set again meanwhile.

Parameter TH and TL
Note the defaults of the TH and TL parameters listed in topic Time response (Page 115).
The on-delay time TH and the off-delay time TL can be provided by the actual value of
another already-programmed function. You can use the actual values of the following
functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

135

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

Timing diagram

Functional description
The 0 to 1 transition at input En triggers a random on-delay time between 0 s and TH. The
output is set when the on-delay time has expired and if the signal at input En remains hi at
least for the duration of this time.
The time is reset if input En is reset before the on-delay time has expired.
A 1 to 0 transition at input EN triggers a random off-delay time between 0 s and TL.
The output is reset after the off-delay time has expired, provided input En remains lo at least
for the duration of this time.
The time is reset if the signal at input En changes to 1 again before the off-delay time has
expired.
The time expired is reset after a power failure.

LOGO!

136

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.9

Stairway lighting switch

Short description
An input edge triggers a configurable and retriggerable time. The output is reset after this
time has expired. A warning signal can be output before this time has expired to warn of the
impending shutdown.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

A signal at input Trg (Trigger) triggers the off-delay
time for the stairway lighting switch.

Parameter

T represents the off-delay time of the output (output
signal transition 1 to 0).
T! determines the triggering time for the pre-warning.
T!L determines the length of the pre-warning signal.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is reset after the time T has expired. A warning
signal can be output before this time has expired.

Parameter T, T! and T!L
Note the defaults of the T parameters listed in topic Time response (Page 115).
The off-delay time T, the pre-warning time T! and the pre-warning period T!L can be provided
by the actual value of another already-programmed function. You can use the actual values
of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

137

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Timing diagram

Functional description
A 0 to 1 signal transition at input Trg sets output Q. The next 1 to 0 transition at Trg
retriggers the current time Ta, and output Q remains set.
Output Q is reset when Ta = T. You can output a warning signal before the off-delay time (T T!) has expired to reset Q for the time of the pre-warning period T!L.
A further one-shot at input Trg during Ta retriggers the time Ta .
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.

Setting the Par parameter
Note the defaults specified in topic Time response (Page 115).
Note
All times must have the same timebase.
View in programming mode (example):

Press

LOGO!

138

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
View in parameter assignment mode (example):

4.4.10

Multiple function switch

Short description
Switch with two different functions:
● Pulse switch with off-delay
● Switch (permanent lighting)
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

A signal at input Trg (Trigger) sets output Q (permanent light) or resets Q with an off-delay. When active,
output Q can be reset with a signal at input Trg.

Input R

A signal at input R resets the current time Ta and
resets the output.

Parameter

T represents the off-delay time. The output is reset (1
to 0 transition) when time T expires.
TL represents the time during which the output must
be set to enable the permanent light function.
T! represents the on-delay for the prewarning time.
T!L represents the length of the prewarning time period.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

A signal at Trg switches on output Q. Depending on
the length of the input at Trg, the output is switched
off again or switched on permanently, or it is reset
with a further signal at Trg.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

139

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters T, TL,T! and T!L
Note the defaults of the T parameters listed in topic Time response (Page 115).
The off-delay time T, the permanent light time TL, the on-delay prewarning time T! and the
prewarning time period T!L can be provided by the actual value of another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

Timing diagram

Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition at input Trg sets output Q.
If output Q = 0, and input Trg is set hi at least for the duration of TL, the permanent lighting
function is enabled and output Q is set accordingly.
The off-delay T is triggered when input Trg returns to 0 before TL has expired.
Output Q is reset when Ta = T.
You can output an off-warning signal prior to the expiration of the off-delay time (T - T!) that
resets Q for the duration of the prewarning time period T!L. A subsequent signal at Trg
always resets T and the output Q.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.

LOGO!

140

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Setting the Par parameter
Note the defaults specified in the topic "Time response (Page 115)".
Note
T, T! and T!L must all have the same timebase.
View in programming mode (example):

Press

View in parameter assignment mode (example):

4.4.11

Weekly timer

Short description
The output is controlled by means of a configurable on/off date. The function supports any
combination of weekdays. You select the active weekdays by hiding the inactive days.
Note
Because LOGO! 24/24o does not have a real-time clock, the weekly timer function is not
available for both versions.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

141

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Symbol in LOGO! Wiring

Description

Cam parameters
1, 2, and 3

At the Cam parameters, you set the on- and off-times of the
weekly timer for each Cam switch. Here you also configure
the days and the time-of-day.

Par

You specify whether the timer pulses on for one cycle when
activated and then reset. The pulse setting applies to all three
cams.

Output Q

Q is set when the configured cam is actuated.

Timing diagram (three examples)

Functional description
Each weekly timer has three cams you can use to configure a time hysteresis. You specify
the on- and off-times at the Cam parameters. The weekly timer sets the output at a certain
on-time, if this is not already set.
The weekly timer resets the output at a certain off-time if you configured an off-time, or at the
end of the cycle if you specified a pulse output. You will cause a conflict if the on- and offtimes you set for the weekly timer are identical, though set on different cams. In this case,
cam3 takes priority over cam2, whereas cam2 takes priority over cam1.
The switching state of the weekly timer is determined by the status of all three cams.

LOGO!

142

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameter assignment screen form
View of the parameter assignment screen form, for example for Cam1 and the Pulse setting:

Days of the week
The prefix "D=" (Day) has the following meaning:
● M: Monday
● T: Tuesday
● W: Wednesday
● T: Thursday
● F: Friday
● S: Saturday
● S: Sunday
Uppercase letters indicate a specific day of the week. A "-" indicates no selection for the day
of the week.

On-/Off-times
Any time between 00:00 h and 23:59 h is possible.You can also configure the on time to be a
pulse signal. The timer block will be activated at the specified time for one cycle and then the
output is reset.
- -:- - means: No on-/off-times set.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

143

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Setting the weekly timer
To set the on-/off-times:
1. Move the cursor to one of the Cam parameters of the timer (e.g. No1).
2. Press OK. LOGO! opens the Cam parameter assignment screen form. The cursor is
positioned on the day of the week.
3. Press

and

to select one or several days of the week.

4. Press

to move the cursor to the first position of the on-time.

5. Set the on-time.
Modify the value at the respective position, using the keys
and . Move to the cursor
and . At the first position, you can only select
to the various positions, using the keys
the value - -:- (- -:- - means: No on-/off-times set).
6. Press

to move the cursor to the first position of the off-time.

7. Set the off-time (in same way as in step 5).
8. Confirm your entries with OK.
The cursor is now positioned on the No2 parameter (Cam2) and you can configure a
further cam.
Note
For information on timer accuracy, refer to the technical data and to the topic "Time
response (Page 115)".

Weekly timer: Example
The output of the weekly timer switch is to be set daily from 06:30 h to 08:00 h. The output
should also be set every Tuesday from 03:10 h to 04:15 h, and on the weekends from 16:30
h to 23:10 h.
This requires three cams.
Here are the parameter assignment screen forms of the cams No 1, 2 and 3, based on the
timing diagram shown earlier.

Cam1
Cam No1 must set the output of the weekly timer daily from 06:30 h to 08:00 h.

LOGO!

144

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Cam2
Cam No2 must set the output of the weekly timer every Tuesday from 03:10 h to 04:15 h.

Cam3
Cam No3 must set the output of the weekly timer switch every Saturday and Sunday from
16:30 h to 23:10 h.

Result

4.4.12

Yearly timer

Short description
The output is controlled by means of a configurable on/off date. You can configure the timer
to activate on a yearly, monthly, or user-defined time basis. With any mode, you can also
configure the timer to pulse the output during the defined time period. The time period is
configurable within the date range of January 1, 2000 to December 31, 2099.
Note
Because LOGO! 24/24o does not have a real-time clock, the yearly timer is not available for
both versions.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

145

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Cam parameter

At the Cam parameter, you configure the timer mode,
the on-/off-times for the timer, and whether the output
is a pulse output.

Output Q

Q is set when the configured cam is switched on.

Timing diagrams
Example 1: Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse Off, On Time = 2000-06-01, Off Time =
2099-08-31: Every year on June 1 the timer output switches on and remains on until August
31.

Example 2:Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse on, On Time = 2000-03-15, Off Time =
2099-**-**: Every year on March 15, the timer switches on for one cycle.

Example 3: Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse off, On Time = 2008-06-01, Off Time =
2010-08-31: On June 1 of 2008, 2009, and 2010 the timer output switches on and remains
on until August 31.

LOGO!

146

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Example 4:Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse on, On Time = 2008-03-15, Off Time =
2010-**-**: On March 15 of 2008, 2009, and 2010, the timer output switches on for one
cycle.

Example 5:Yearly mode off, Monthly mode off, Pulse off, On Time = 2008-06-01, Off Time =
2008-08-31: On June 1, 2008 the timer output switches on and remains on until August 31,
2010.

Example 6:Yearly mode off, Monthly mode off, Pulse selected, On Time = 2008-03-15, Off
Time = ****-**-**: On March 15, 2008 the timer output switches on for one cycle. Because the
timer does not have a monthly action or yearly action, the timer output pulses only one time
at the specified On Time.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

147

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Example 7:Yearly mode on, Monthly mode off, Pulse off, On Time = 2008-12-15, Off Time =
2010-01-07: On December 15 of 2008 and 2009, the timer output switches on and remains
on until January 7 of the following year. When the timer output turns off on January 7, 2010 it
does NOT turn on again the following December 15.

Example 8:Yearly mode on, Monthly mode on, On Time = 2008-**-01, Off Time = 2010-**05: Starting in 2008, on the first day of each month the timer output switches on and
switches off on the fifth day of the month. The timer continues in this pattern through the last
month of 2010.

LOGO!

148

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Functional description
The yearly timer sets and resets the output at specific on and off dates. Sets and resets are
executed at 00:00. If your application requires a different time, use a weekly timer together
with a yearly timer in your circuit program.
The on time specifies when the timer is activated. The off time specifies when the output is
reset again. For the on and off times, note the order of the fields: The first field defines the
year, the second the month and the third the day.
If you set the Monthly mode on, the timer output switches on each month at the specified day
of the on time and remains on until the specified day of the off time. The on time specifies
the initial year in which the timer is activated. The off time defines the last year in which the
timer turns off. The maximum year is 2099.
If you set the Yearly mode on, the timer output switches on each year at the specified month
and day of the on time and remains on until the specified month and day of the off time. The
on time specifies the initial year in which the timer is activated. The off time defines the last
year in which the timer turns off. The maximum year is 2099.
If you set Pulse output, the timer output switches on at the specified on time for one cycle
and then the timer output is reset. You can choose to pulse a timer on a monthly or yearly
basis, or just a single time.
If you set none of the Monthly, Yearly, or Pulse modes on, you can define a specific time
period with the on time and off time. It can span any time period that you choose.
For a process action that is to be switched on and off at multiple but irregular times during
the year, you can define multiple yearly timers with the outputs connected by an OR function
block.

Backup of the real-time clock
The internal real-time clock of LOGO! is buffered against power failure. The buffering time is
influenced by the ambient temperature, and is typically 80 hours at an ambient temperature
of 25°C. If you are using the optional LOGO! Battery card, or combined LOGO!
Memory/Battery card, LOGO! can retain the clock time for up to two years.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

149

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Sample configuration
The output of a LOGO! is to be set annually on March 1, reset on April 4, set again on July 7,
and reset again on November 19. You need to configure two yearly timers with
corresponding on-times. Then logically link the outputs by means of an OR block.

Result

LOGO!

150

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.13

Up/down counter

Short description
An input pulse increments or decrements an internal value, depending on the parameter
setting. The output is set or reset when a configured threshold is reached. The direction of
count can be changed with a signal at input Dir.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input R

A signal at input R resets the internal count value to
zero.

Input Cnt

The function counts the 0 to 1 transitions at input Cnt.
1 to 0 transitions are not counted.
Use

Input Dir

•

inputs I3, I4, I5, and I6 for fast counting (only
LOGO! 12/24RC/RCo, LOGO! 24/24o and LOGO!
24C/24Co): max. 5 kHz.

•

any other input or circuit component for counting
low frequency signals (typ. 4 Hz).

You set the direction of count at input Dir:
Dir = 0: Up count
Dir = 1: Down count

Parameter

On: On threshold
Range of values:
0...999999
Off: Off threshold
Range of values:
0...999999
StartVal: Initial value from which to begin counting
either down or up.
Retentivity for internal counter value Cnt:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is set or reset, depending on the current value at
Cnt and the set thresholds.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

151

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters On and Off
The on threshold On and the off threshold Off can be provided by the actual value of another
already-programmed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number.

Timing diagram

Functional description
The internal counter increments (Dir = 0) or decrements (Dir = 1) by one count with every
positive edge at input Cnt.
You can use input R to reset the internal count value to the start value. As long as R = 1, the
output is also 0 and the pulses at input Cnt are not counted.
If retentivity is not set, output Q and the expired time are reset after a power failure.
Q is set or reset depending on the current value at Cnt and the set thresholds. See the
calculation rule below.

LOGO!

152

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Calculation rule
● If the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if Cnt ≥ On
Q = 0, if Cnt < Off
● If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1, if On ≤ Cnt ≤ Off.
Note
The system scans the counter limit value cyclically.
Thus, if the pulse frequency at the fast digital inputs I3, I4, I5 or I6 is faster than the cycle
time, the special function might not switch until after the specified limit value is exceeded.
Example: Up to 100 pulses per cycle can be counted; 900 pulses have been counted so
far. On = 950; Off = 10000. The output is set in the next cycle, after the value has
reached 1000. (The output would not be set at all if the value Off = 980).
View in programming mode (example):

To set the start value, press

or

to access the following screen form:

If the referenced block (B021, in the example) returns a value that lies out of the valid range,
the value is rounded to the next valid value.
The view in parameter assignment mode (example):

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

153

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.14

Hours counter

Short description
A configured time is triggered with a signal at the monitoring input. The output is set when
this time has expired.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input R

A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input R resets
output Q and sets a configured value MI at the counter for the duration of the time-to-go (MN).

Input En

En is the monitoring input. LOGO! scans the on-time
of this input.

Input Ral

A positive edge at input Ral (Reset all) resets the
hours counter (OT) and the output, and sets the timeto-go value (MN) tothe maintenance interval MI:

Parameter

•

Output Q = 0

•

Measured operating time OT = 0

•

Time-to-go of the maintenance interval MN = MI.

MI: Maintenance interval to be preset in units of hours
and minutes
Range of values:
0000...9999 h, 0...59 m
OT: The accumulated total operating time; you can
specify an offset in hours and minutes
Range of values:
00000...99999 h, 0...59 m
Q → 0:

Output Q

•

When "R" is selected:
Q = 1, if MN = 0;
Q = 0, if R = 1 or Ral = 1

•

When "R+En" is selected:
Q = 1, if MN = 0;
Q = 0, if R = 1 or Ral = 1 or En = 0.

The output is set when the time-to-go MN = 0 (see
timing diagram).
The output is reset:
•

When "Q→0:R+En", if
R = 1 or Ral = 1 or En = 0

•

When "Q→:R", if R = 1 or Ral = 1.

MI = Configured time interval
MN = Time-to-go
OT = Total time expired since the last hi signal at input Ral
These values are always retentive!

LOGO!

154

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameter MI
The maintenance interval MI can be provided by the actual value of another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number.

Timing diagram

Functional description
The hours counter monitors input En. When En = 1, LOGO! computes the time expired and
the time-to-go MN. LOGO! shows these times in parameter assignment mode. Output Q is
set when the time-to-go MN = 0.
A signal at reset input R resets output Q and sets the preset value of MI at the counter for
the duration of MN. The hours counter OT is not affected.
With a signal at the reset input Ral, you reset output Q and set the preset value of MI at the
counter for the duration of MN. The hours counter OT is reset to zero.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

155

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
Depending on your configuration of parameter Q, the output is either reset with a signal at
input R or Ral ("Q→0:R"), or when a reset signal is set hi, or the En signal is set lo
("Q→0:R+En").

Viewing the MI, MN and OT values
● LOGO! Basic: You can open the parameter assignment mode when the system is in RUN
to view the actual values of MI, MN and OT.
● LOGO! Pure: In LOGO!Soft Comfort, you can use the Online Test to read these values.
For further information, see chapter "AUTOHOTSPOT".
● In LOGO!Soft Comfort you can get the hours counter via the "Tools -> Transfer: Hours
counter" menu command.

Limit value of OT
The value of the operating hours in OT is retained when you reset the hours counter with a
signal at input R. The hours counter OT will be reset to zero with a transition from 0 to 1 at
Ral. The hours counter OT continues the count as long as En = 1, irrespective of the status
at the reset input R. The counter limit of OT is 99999 h. The hours counter stops when it
reaches this value.
In programming mode, you can set the initial value of OT. MN is calculated according to the
following formula when reset input R is never enabled: MN = MI - (OT % MI). The % operator
provides an integer division remainder.
Example:
MI = 30h, OT = 100h
MN = 30 - (100 % 30)
MN = 30 -10
MN = 20h

In runtime mode, the value OT can not be preset. If the value for MI is changed, there would
be no calculation for the MN. MN would take on the value of MI.

LOGO!

156

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Setting the Par parameter
View in programming mode:

MI is the configurable time interval. The permissible range of values is 0 to 9999 hours.
For information on how to assign the actual value of another already-programmed function to
a parameter, see the On-delay (Page 123) topic.
View in parameter assignment mode:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

157

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.15

Threshold trigger

Short description
The output is set and reset with two configurable threshold triggers.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Fre

The function counts the 0 to 1 transitions at input Fre.
1 to 0 transitions are not counted.
Use

Parameter

•

inputs I3, I4, I5, I6 for fast counting (only LOGO!
12/24RC/RCo, LOGO! 24/24o and LOGO!
24C/24Co): max. 5 kHz.

•

any other input or circuit component for counting
low frequency signals (typ. 4 Hz).

On: On threshold
Range of values:
0000...9999
Off: Off threshold
Range of values:
0000...9999
G_T: Time interval or gate time during which the input
pulses are measured.
Range of values:
00:05 s...99:99 s

Output Q

Q is set and reset at the thresholds.

Parameter G_T
The gate time G_T can be provided by the actual value of another already-programmed
function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number.

LOGO!

158

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Timing diagram

Functional description
The threshold trigger measures the signals at input Fre. The pulses are recorded across a
configurable time G_T.
Output Q is set and reset in accordance with the set thresholds. See the calculation rule
below.

Calculation rule
● If the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if fa > On
Q = 0, if fa ≤ Off.
● If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1 if
On ≤ fa < Off.

Setting the Par parameter
Note
The system scans the counter limit value once per interval G_T.
View in programming mode (example):

Press

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

159

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Note
The "seconds" timebase is here set as permanent default.
When you preset a time G_T of 1 s, LOGO! returns the current frequency in parameter fa in
Hz.
View in parameter assignment mode (example):

Note
fa always represents the total pulses measured per time unit G_T.

4.4.16

Analog threshold trigger

Short description
The output is set and reset at two configurable thresholds.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Ax

You apply the analog signal to be analyzed at input
Ax.
Use the analog inputs AI1...AI8 (*), the analog flags
AM1...AM6, the block number of a function with analog output, or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2.

Parameter

A: Gain
Range of values: ±10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values: ±10,000
On: On threshold
Range of values: ±20,000
Off: Off threshold
Range of values: ±20,000
p: Number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3

Output Q

Q is set or reset by the threshold triggers.

* AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).

LOGO!

160

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Gain and offset parameters
Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in topic "Calculating the gain and
offset of analog values (Page 117)".

Parameters On and Off
The On and Off parameters can be provided by the actual value of another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number.

Parameter p (number of decimals)
Does not apply to the display of On, Off and Ax values in a message text.
Does not apply to the comparison of On and Off values! (The compare function ignores the
decimal point.)

Timing diagram

Functional description
The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax.
Ax is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and the value at parameter B (offset)
is added to product, i.e. (Ax • gain) + offset = actual value of Ax.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on the set thresholds. See the calculation rule below.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

161

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Calculation rule
● If the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if the actual value Ax > On
Q = 0, if the actual value Ax ≤ Off.
● If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1 if
On ≤ actual value Ax < Off.

Setting the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in programming mode (example):

Press

View in parameter assignment mode (example):

View in the message text (example):

LOGO!

162

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.17

Analog differential trigger

Short description
The output is set and reset depending on a configurable threshold and a differential value.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Ax

You apply the analog signal to be analyzed at input
Ax.
Use the analog inputs AI1...AI8 (*), the analog flags
AM1...AM6, the block number of a function with analog output, or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2.

Parameter

A: Gain
Range of values: ±10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values: ±10,000
On: On/Off threshold
Range of values: ±20,000
Δ: Differential value for calculating the off parameter
Range of values: ±20,000
p: Number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3

Output Q

Q is set or reset, depending on the threshold and
difference values.

* AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).

Gain and offset parameters
Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in topic "Calculating the gain and
offset of analog values (Page 117)".

Parameter p (number of decimals)
Does not apply to the display of On, Off and Ax values in a message text.

Timing diagram A: Function with negative difference Δ

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

163

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Timing diagram B: Function with positive difference Δ

Functional description
The function fetches the analog signal at input Ax.
Ax is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and the value at parameter B (offset)
is added to product, i.e. (Ax • gain) + offset = actual value of Ax.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on the set (On) threshold and difference value (Δ). The
function automatically calculates the Off parameter: Off = On + Δ, whereby Δ may be
positive or negative. See the calculation rule below.

Calculation rule
● When you set a negative differential value Δ, the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, and:
Q = 1, if the actual value Ax > On
Q = 0, if the actual value Ax ≤ Off.
See the timing diagram A.
● When you set a positive differential value Δ, the On threshold < the Off threshold, and Q
= 1, if:
On ≤ actual value Ax < Off.
See the timing diagram B.

Setting the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in programming mode (example):

Press

LOGO!

164

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
View in parameter assignment mode (example):

Press

4.4.18

Analog comparator

Short description
The output is set and reset depending on the difference Ax - Ay and on two configurable
thresholds.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Inputs Ax and Ay

You apply the analog signals the difference of which
you want to analyze at the inputs Ax and Ay.
Use the analog inputs AI1...AI8 (*), the analog flags
AM1...AM6, the block number of a function with analog output, or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2.

Parameter

A: Gain
Range of values: ±10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values: ±10,000
On: On threshold
Range of values: ±20,000
Off: Off threshold
Range of values: ±20,000
p: Number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3

Output Q

Q is set or reset, depending on the difference Ax - Ay
and the set thresholds..

* AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).

Gain and offset parameters
For more information on the gain and offset parameters, refer to topic "Calculating the gain
and offset of analog values (Page 117)".

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

165

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters On and Off
The on threshold On and the off threshold Off can be provided by the actual value of another
already-programmed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number.

Parameter p (number of decimals)
Does not apply to Ax, Ay, On, Off and Δ values displayed in a message text.
Does not apply to the comparison of on and off values! (The compare function ignores the
decimal point.)

Timing diagram

LOGO!

166

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Functional description
The function fetches the analog values from the inputs Ax and Ay.
Ax and Ay are each multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and the value at
parameter B (offset) is then added to the relevant product, i.e.
(Ax • gain) + offset = actual value Ax or
(Ay • gain) + offset = actual value Ay.
The function forms the difference ("Δ") between the actual values Ax - Ay.
Output Q is set or reset, depending on difference of the actual values Ax - Ay and the set
thresholds. See the calculation rule below.

Calculation rule
● If the On threshold ≥ Off threshold, then:
Q = 1, if:
(actual value Ax - actual value Ay) > On
Q = 0, if:
(actual value Ax - actual value Ay) ≤ Off.
● If the On threshold < Off threshold, then Q = 1, if:
On ≤ (actual value Ax - actual value Ay) < Off.

Setting the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in programming mode:

Press

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

167

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Example
In a heating control system, the supply Tv and return line temperatures Tr are to be
compared, for example with a sensor at AI2.
A control signal is to be triggered (for example "heater On") when the difference between the
supply and return line temperatures is greater than 15 °C. The control signal is reset when
the difference is less than 5 °C.
The process variable of the temperature is to be shown in parameter assignment mode.
The thermocouples available have the following technical data: -30 to +70 °C, 0 to 10 VDC.
Application

Internal mapping

-30 to +70 °C = 0 to 10 V DC

0 to 1000

0 °C

300
→ Offset = -30

Range of values:

1000

-30 to +70 °C = 100

→ Gain = 100/1000 = 0.1

On threshold = 15 °C

Threshold = 15

Off threshold = 5 °C

Threshold = 5

See also topic "Calculating the gain and offset of analog values (Page 117) ".

Configuration (example):

Press

LOGO!

168

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
View in parameter assignment mode (example):

Press

View in the message text (example):

Reducing the input response of the analog comparator
You can selectively delay the output of an analog comparator by means of the "On-delay"
and "Off-delay" special functions. With on-delay, output Q is only set if the pulse width of the
triggering signal at input Trg (=analog comparator output) is longer than the on-delay time.
Using this method, you will obtain a virtual hysteresis and reduce the input response to short
signals.

Function block diagram

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

169

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.19

Analog watchdog

Short description
This special function saves the process variable of an analog input to memory, and sets the
output when the output variable exceeds or drops below this stored value plus a configurable
offset.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input En saves
the analog value at input Ax ("Aen") to memory and
starts monitoring of the analog range Aen - Δ 2 to
Aen+ Δ 1

Input Ax

You apply the analog signal to be monitored at input
Ax.
Use the analog inputs AI1...AI8 (*), the analog flags
AM1...AM6, the block number of a function with analog output, or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2.

Parameter

A: Gain
Range of values: ±10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values: ±10,000
Δ1:Difference value above Aen:
on/off threshold
Range of values: 0-20,000
Δ 2:Difference value below
Aen: on/off threshold
Range of values: 0-20,000
p: Number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive in memory

Output Q

Q is set/reset, depending on the stored analog value
and the offset.

* AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).

Gain and offset parameters
For more information on gain and offset parameters, refer to topic "Calculating the gain and
offset of analog values (Page 117)".

LOGO!

170

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters Delta1 and Delta2
The Delta1 and Delta2 parameters can be provided by the actual value of another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual value of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number.

Parameter p (number of decimals)
Applies only to the Aen, Ax, Δ 1 and Δ 2 values displayed in a message text.

Timing diagram

Functional description
A 0 to 1 transition at input En saves the value of the signal at the analog input Ax. This saved
process variable is referred to as "Aen".
Both the analog actual values Ax and Aen are multiplied by the value at parameter A (gain),
and parameter B (offset) is then added to the product:
(Ax • gain) + offset = Actual value Aen, when input En changes from 0 to 1, or
(Ax • gain) + offset = Actual value Ax.
Output Q is set when the signal at input En = 1 and if the actual value at input Ax is out of
range of Aen - Δ 2 to Aen + Δ 1 .
Output Q is reset, when the actual value at input Ax lies within the range of Aen - Δ 2 to Aen+
Δ 1, or when the signal at input En changes to lo.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

171

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Setting the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the used sensors to the respective
application.
View in programming mode:

Press

View in parameter assignment mode (example):

LOGO!

172

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.20

Analog amplifier

Short description
This special function amplifies the value of an analog input and outputs the result at an
analog output.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Ax

You apply the analog signal to be amplified at input
Ax.
Use the analog inputs AI1...AI8 (*), the analog flags
AM1...AM6, the block number of a function with analog output, or the analog outputs AQ1 and AQ2.

Parameter

A: Gain
Range of values: ±10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values: ±10,000
p: Number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3

Output AQ

This special function has an analog output! This output can only be connected with the analog input of a
function, an analog flag or an analog output connector (AQ1, AQ2).
Range of values for AQ:
-32767...+32767

* AI1...AI8: 0...10 V corresponds with 0...1000 (internal value).

Gain and offset parameters
Please note the information on gain and offset parameters in topic Calculating the gain and
offset of analog values (Page 117).

Parameter p (number of decimals)
Applies only to the AQ value in a message text.

Functional description
The function fetches the analog signal of input Ax.
This value is multiplied by the value of the A (gain) parameter, and parameter B (offset) is
then added to the product: (Ax • gain) + offset = actual value Ax.
The actual value Ax is output at AQ.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

173

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Analog output
If you interconnect this special function with a real analog output, note that the analog output
can only process values between 0 and 1000. To do this, you may need to connect an
additional amplifier between the analog output of the special function and the real analog
output. Using this amplifier, you standardize the output range of the special function to a
value range of 0 to 1000.

Scaling an analog input value
You can influence the analog input value of a potentiometer by interconnecting an analog
input with an analog amplifier and an analog flag.
● Scale the analog value at the analog amplifier for further use.
● Connect, for example, the time base for parameter T of a time function (e.g. On-/Off-delay
(Page 127)) or the on and/or off limit specification of an up/down counter (Page 151) to
the scaled analog value.
For more information with programming examples refer to the online help for LOGO!Soft
Comfort.

Setting the Par parameter
The gain and offset parameters are used to adapt the sensors to the relevant application.
View in programming mode (example):

View in parameter assignment mode (example):

LOGO!

174

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.21

Latching relay

Short description
Input S sets output Q, input R resets output Q again.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input S

You set output Q with a signal at input S.

Input R

You reset output Q with a signal at input R. If S and R
= 1, the output is reset.

Parameter

Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is set with a signal at input S, and reset with a
signal at input R.

Timing diagram

Switching response
A latching relay represents a simple binary element. The output value depends on the status
at the inputs and on the previous output status. The following table shows the logic once
again:
Sn

Rn

Q

Comment

0

0

x

The status is retentive

0

1

0

Reset

1

0

1

Set

1

1

0

Reset (takes priority over Set)

When retentivity is enabled, the current status of the output signal is retained after a power
failure.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

175

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.22

Pulse relay

Short description
A short pulse at the input sets and resets the output.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input Trg

You set and reset output Q with a signal at input Trg
(Trigger).

Input S

You set output Q with a signal at input S.

Input R

You reset output Q with a signal at input R.

Parameter

Selection:
RS (R input priority) or
SR (S input priority)
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

Q is set with a signal at Trg, and reset with the next
signal at Trg, if S and R = 0.

Timing diagram

Functional description
Output Q changes its status; that is, the output is set or reset with each 0 to 1 transition at
input Trg and if the inputs S and R = 0.
The signal at input Trg does not influence the special function when S or R = 1.
You set the pulse relay with a signal at input S. The output is set hi.
You reset the pulse relay with a signal at input R. The output is set lo.

LOGO!

176

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Status diagram
Par

Qn-1

S

R

Trg

Qn

*

0

0

0

0

0

*

0

0

0

0 ->1

1**

*

0

0

1

0

0

*

0

0

1

0 ->1

0

*

0

1

0

0

1

*

0

1

0

0 ->1

1

RS

0

1

1

0

0

RS

0

1

1

0 ->1

0

SR

0

1

1

0

1

SR

0

1

1

0 ->1

1

*

1

0

0

0

1

*

1

0

0

0 ->1

0**

*

1

0

1

0

0

*

1

0

1

0 ->1

0

*

1

1

0

0

1

*

1

1

0

0 ->1

1

RS

1

1

1

0

0

RS

1

1

1

0 ->1

0

SR

1

1

1

0

1

SR

1

1

1

0 ->1

1

*: RS or SR
**: Triggering signal is effective, because S and R = 0.

Depending on your configuration, either input R takes priority over input S (input S is not
effective when R = 1), or vice versa (input R is not effective when S = 1).
After a power failure, the pulse relay and output Q are reset if you have not enabled
retentivity.
View in programming mode:

This special function is not available in parameter assignment mode.
Note
If Trg = 0 and Par = RS, the special function "Pulse relay" corresponds with the special
function "Latching relay (Page 175)".

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

177

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.23

Message texts

Short description
With the message text function block, you can configure a message that includes text and
other parameters for LOGO! to display in RUN mode.
You can configure simple message texts from the LOGO! onboard display. LOGO!Soft
Comfort provides an extended set of features for message texts: bar graph representation of
data, names for digital I/O states and more. Refer to the LOGO!Soft Comfort documentation
for information on these features.

Global Message Text Settings
You configure global parameters that apply to all message texts from the Msg Config
selections on the Programming menu:
● Analog Time: refresh rate in milliseconds that specifies how frequently analog inputs in
message texts are updated
● Tick time: frequency at which message texts scroll on and off the display
There are two ways that a message text can tick on and off the screen: line by line, or
character by character, which are described in more detail below. A line of a text
message, or each character of a text message in turn will tick on and off the
LOGO! onboard display based on the tick time. For a message that ticks line by line, the
actual tick time is ten times the configured tick time. For messages that tick character by
character, the actual tick time is the configured tick time.
● CharSets: The primary and secondary character sets from which you can configure
message texts. CharSet1 and CharSet2 can be any of the supported character sets for
LOGO!:
Character Set
in LOGO!

Common
Name

Supports Languages Internet Reference

ISO8859-1

Latin-1

English, German,
Italian, Spanish
(partly), Dutch (partly)

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO/IEC_8859-1

ISO8859-5

Cyrillic

Russian

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO/IEC_8859-5

ISO8859-9

Latin-5

Turkish

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO/IEC_8859-9

ISO8859-16

Latin-10

French

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO/IEC_8859-16

GB-2312

Chinese

Chinese

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/GB2312

Shift-JIS

Japanese Japanese

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shift-jis

LOGO!

178

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
● Current Character Set: which character set is selected for the display of message texts
Note
Message texts supported by LOGO! 0BA5 will display on the LOGO! TD only when the
following conditions are met:
- CharSet1 is selected and set to ISO8859-1
- Current Character Set "CurrCharSet" is set to CharSet1
Of the fifty possible message texts that you can configure, you can select any number of
them to be from the first language and any number from the second language. For example,
you could configure fifty message text function blocks that have a single message text for
Character Set 1. Alternatively, you could configure twenty-five message text function blocks,
each of which has two message texts: one for Character Set 1 and one for Character Set 2.
Any combination is valid such that the total does not exceed fifty.
Within a single message text, the text must be from one character set. You can edit
message texts in any of the supported character sets from LOGO!Soft Comfort. From the
LOGO! Basic, you can only edit text using characters from the ISO8859-1 character set.
The language and therefore character set of a message text is independent of the language
setting for menus on the LOGO! onboard display. They can be different.

Chinese Character Set
The LOGO! Basic and LOGO! TD support the Chinese character set (GB-2312) for the
People's Republic of China. The devices use Microsoft Windows encoding for this character
set. The Windows encoding allows the devices to display the same characters as shown in
the LOGO!Soft Comfort message text editor when you are using a Chinese emulator or a
Chinese version of Microsoft Windows.
The Chinese character set requires a Chinese version of Windows or a Chinese emulator to
properly display Chinese characters in the LOGO!Soft Comfort message text editor. You
must start the Chinese emulator before you open the the message text function block in
LOGO!Soft Comfort.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

179

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Programming Global Message Text Parameters

LOGO!

180

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Message Text Function Block
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

A 0 to 1 transition at input En (Enable) starts the
output of the message text.

Input P

P: Priority of the message text
Range of values: 0...127
Message destination
Message tick settings
Ack: Acknowledgment of the message text

Parameter

Text: Input of the message text
Par: Parameter or actual value of another alreadyprogrammed function (see "Visible parameters or
process variables")
Time: Display of the continuously updated time-of-day
Date: Display of the continuously updated date
EnTime: Display of the time of the 0 to 1 transition of
the signal at input En
EnDate: Display of the date of the 0 to 1 transition of
the signal at input En
I/O status names: Display of a digital input or output
status name, for example "On" or "Off"
Analog Input: Display of an analog input value to be
shown in message text and updated according to the
analog time.
Note: You can only edit the Text parameter of the
message from the LOGO! Basic. ISO8859-1 is the
only available character set for editing text. You can
edit all other parameters, and other languages for the
Text parameter from LOGO!Soft Comfort. See the
online help for configuration details.

Output Q

Q remains set as long as the message text is set.

Restriction
A maximum of 50 message texts are available.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

181

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Functional description
When LOGO! is in RUN mode, LOGO! displays the message text that you have configured
along with its parameter values upon a 0 to 1 transition of the signal at input En.
Based on your setting for the message destination, the message text displays on the
LOGO! onboard display, the LOGO! TD, or both.
If you use flag M27 in your circuit program, then if M27=0 (low) then LOGO! displays the
message text only if it is from the primary character set (Character Set 1). If M27=1 (high),
then LOGO! displays the message text only if is from the secondary character set (Character
Set 2). (See the M27 flag description in topic Constants and connectors - Co (Page 103)).
If you have configured message ticking, the message will tick on and off the display
according to your specifications, either a character at a time, or a line at a time.
If acknowledgment is disabled (Ack = Off), the message text is hidden when the status of the
signal at input En changes from 1 to 0.
If acknowledgment is enabled (Ack = On) and the status of the signal at input En changes
from 1 to 0, the message text is output until it is acknowledged with OK. When En = 1, you
cannot acknowledge the message text.
When multiple message text functions are triggered with En=1, LOGO! displays the message
text with the highest priority (0 = lowest, 127 = highest). This also means that LOGO!
displays a newly activated message text only if its priority is higher than that of previously
activated message texts.
After a message text is disabled or acknowledged, the function automatically shows the
previously active message text that takes the highest priority.
You can press the

and

keys to step through multiple active message texts.

Example
This is how two message texts could be shown:

LOGO!

182

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Message Ticking
You can configure message text lines to tick or not tick. Two types of message ticking exist:
● Character by character
● Line by line
Messages that tick character by character scroll off the characters of the message line one
character at a time to the left with the additional characters scrolling in one at a time from the
right. The time interval for the tick is specified by the TickTime message text setting.
Messages that tick line by line by line scroll one half of the message off the display to the left
with the second half of the message scrolling in from the right. The time interval for the tick is
ten times the TickTime parameter. The two halves of the message simply alternate on the
LOGO! onboard display or LOGO! TD.

Example: Tick Message Character by Character
The following illustration shows a one-line, 24-character message text:

If you set this message to tick "character by character" with a tick interval of 0.1 seconds,
then the initial appearance of this message line on the LOGO! onboard display or LOGO! TD
is as shown in this illustration:

After 0.1 second, one character of the message line ticks. The message appears as follows
on the LOGO! onboard display or LOGO! TD:

Example: Tick Message Line by Line
The following example uses the same message configuration as the previous example:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

183

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
If you set this message to tick "line by line" with a tick interval of 0.1 seconds, then the initial
appearance of this message on the LOGO! onboard display or LOGO! TD is the left half of
the message as shown in this illustration:

After 1 second (10 x 0.1 second), the message ticks to show the right half of the message as
shown in this illustration:

The screen display alternates between the two message halves every second.
You can configure each individual line of a message text to tick or not tick. The "character by
character" or "line by line" setting applies to all lines that you configure to tick.

Input P configuration
From the input P, you configure the following characteristics of the message text:
● Priority
● Acknowledgement
● Message destination
● Tick type, and tick setting for each line
To configure the priority and the acknowledgment (programming mode):

1. Increase the priority to 1: Cursor on '0' +
2. Change to 'Ack': Press
3. Enable 'Ack': Press

or

LOGO! shows:

LOGO!

184

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
To configure the message destination and tick type (programming mode):
1. From the Priority and Acknowledgement screen form, press
Destination screen form.

2. Press

to access the Message

to position the cursor on the "BM" line.

3. Press
or
BM & TD.

to toggle through the three choices for message destination: BM, TD, or

4. From the Message Destination screen form, press
form.

to access the Tick Type screen

5. If your message text has lines that tick, press
to position the cursor on the "Ch by Ch"
or
to select either "Ch by Ch" or "Ln by Ln" for the TickType.
line and then press
6. From the Tick Type screen, press
to enable or disable ticking for each line of the
message text. LOGO! displays the following screen form:

7. Press

or

to choose between "No" and "Yes" to define whether line 1 ticks.

8. Press
to move the cursor to the second line, and press
or to choose between
to go to the screen from for lines 3
"No" and "Yes" for line 2. From the last line press
and 4. Configure line ticking for lines 3 and 4 in the same way as for lines 1 and 2.

9. Press OK to confirm the complete message text configuration.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

185

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Visible parameters or process variables
The following parameters or process variables can be displayed in a message text, as either
numerical values or bar-graph representations of values:
Special function

Parameter or process variable visible in a message text

Timers
On-delay

T, Ta

Off-delay

T, Ta

On-/Off-delay

Ta, TH, TL

Retentive on-delay

T, Ta

Wiping relay
(pulse output)

T, Ta

Edge triggered
wiping relay

Ta, TH, TL

Asynchronous pulse generator

Ta, TH, TL

Random generator

TH, TL

Stairway lighting switch

Ta, T, T!, T!L

Multiple function switch

Ta, T, TL, T!, T!L

Weekly timer

3*on/off/day

Yearly timer

On, Off

Counter
Up/down counter

Cnt, On, Off

Hours counter

MI, Q, OT

Threshold trigger

fa, On, Off, G_T

Analog
Analog threshold trigger

On, Off, A, B, Ax

Analog differential trigger

On, n, A, B, Ax, Off

Analog comparator

On, Off, A, B, Ax, Ay, nA

Analog value monitoring

n, A, B, Ax, Aen

Analog amplifier

A, B, Ax

Analog multiplexer

V1, V2, V3, V4, AQ

Analog ramp

L1, L2, MaxL, StSp, Rate, A, B, AQ

PI controller

SP, Mq, KC, TI, Min, Max, A, B, PV, AQ

Analog math

V1, V2, V3, V4, AQ

PWM (Pulse Width Modulator)

A, B, T, Ax amplified

Miscellaneous
Latching relay

-

Pulse relay

-

Message texts

-

Softkey

On/Off

Shift register

-

For timers, a message text can also display the remaining time. "Remaining time" refers to
how much time of the parameter setting remains.
LOGO!

186

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
Bar graphs can be either horizontal or vertical representations of the current or actual value
scaled between the minimum and maximum value. For more information on configuring and
displaying bar graphs in message texts, refer to the LOGO!Soft Comfort online help.

Editing message texts
Only simple message texts can be edited from the LOGO! Basic. Text messages created in
LOGO!Soft Comfort that make use of new features such as bar graphs, I/O status names,
and others can not be edited from the LOGO! Basic.
Also, you cannot edit message texts from the LOGO! Basic that contain any of the following
parameters:
● Par
● Time
● Date
● EnTime
● EnDate
You can only edit such message texts from LOGO!Soft Comfort.

Changing parameters in the active message text
When the message text is active, press ESC to select the editing mode.
Note
You must keep the ESC key pressed for at least one second.
Press
and
to select the relevant parameter. Press OK to change the parameter. Use
and
keys to edit a parameter.
the
Confirm your changes with OK. You can now edit further parameters in the message text (if
any exist). Press ESC to exit editing mode.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

187

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Key input simulation in the active message text
You can enable the four cursor keys C , C
pressing ESC plus the relevant cursor key.

,C

and C

in an active message text by

Setting the Par parameter
View in programming mode:

Press

to select a line for the message text.

Press
and
to select the letter to be displayed in the text. To move the cursor from one
and .
position to the other, press
The list of available characters is the same as for the circuit program name. The character
set is found in topic Circuit program input (Page 71). When you enter message text from the
LOGO! Basic, you can only enter characters from the ISO8859-1 character set. To enter text
from another language, you must enter the text in LOGO!Soft Comfort.
Note that the number of characters per line of message text can be greater than the number
of character positions on the LOGO! onboard display.
Press OK to confirm your changes, and press ESC to exit the editing mode.

LOGO!

188

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.24

Softkey

Short description
This special function has the effect of a mechanical pushbutton or switch.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

Output Q is set with a 0 to 1 transition of the signal at
input En (Enable), and if 'Switch=On' was confirmed
in parameter assignment mode.

Parameter

Programming mode:
Selecting the function for pushbutton action for the
duration of one cycle, or for switching action.
Start: On or off state, initialized at the first start of the
program if retentivity is disabled.
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.
Parameter assignment mode (RUN mode):
Switch: Switches the momentary pushbutton (switch)
on or off.

Output Q

Switches on if En=1 and Switch=On was confirmed
with OK.

Factory setting
The default parameter setting is switching action.

Timing diagram

Functional description
In parameter assignment mode, the output is set with a signal at input En, if the 'Switch'
parameter is set to 'On' and confirmed with OK. Whether the function was configured for
pushbutton or switching action is of no concern here.
The output is reset to '0' in the following three cases:
● After a 1 to 0 transition at input En
● When the function was configured for momentary pushbutton action, and one cycle has
expired since it was switched on
● When the position 'Off' was selected at the 'Switch' parameter and confirmed with OK in
parameter assignment mode
LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

189

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
If retentivity is not set, output Q is initialized after a power failure according to your
configuration at the "Start" parameter.

Setting the Par parameter
View in programming mode (example):
1. Select the 'Softkey' function.
2. Select input En and confirm with OK. The cursor is now positioned below 'Par'.
3. Change to the input mode of 'Par': Confirm with OK
(the cursor is now positioned to 'On')

To change 'Par' to 'Switch' action and the initialization status after the program start:
4. To select 'Momentary pushbutton' or 'Switch' action: Press

5. To change to the start state: Press
6. To change the start state: Press

or

or
or

7. Confirm your entries with OK
View in parameter assignment mode (example):
Here, you can set or reset the 'Switch' parameter (On/Off). When in RUN, LOGO! shows the
following display:

LOGO!

190

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
Let us assume you want to set 'Switch' (On).
1. Change to the editing mode: Confirm with OK (the cursor is now positioned on 'Off')
2. To change from 'Off' to 'On': Press

or

3. Confirm your entries with Press OK

4.4.25

Shift register

Short description
You can use the shift register function to read the value of an input and to shift its bits left or
right. The output value corresponds with the configured shift register bit. The shifting
direction can be changed at a special input.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input In

Input read at the start of the function.

Input Trg

A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Trg (Trigger) starts the special function. 1 to 0 transitions are
irrelevant.

Input Dir

The signal at input Dir determines the shifting direction for the shift register bits S1...S8:
Dir = 0: Shift up (S1 >> S8)
Dir = 1: Shift down (S8 >> S1)

Parameter

Shift register bit that determines the value at output
Q.
Possible settings: S1 ... S8
Retentivity:
/ = No retentivity
R = The status is retentive.

Output Q

The output value corresponds with the configured
shift register bit.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

191

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Functional description
The function reads the value at input In with a positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input Trg
(Trigger).
This value is applied to shift register bit S1 or S8, depending on the shifting direction:
● Shift up: The value at input In is set at S1; the previous value at S1 is shifted to S2; the
previous value at S2 is shifted to S3 etc.
● Shift down: The value at input In is set at S8; the previous value at S8 is shifted to S7; the
previous value at S7 is shifted to S6 etc.
Output Q returns the value of the configured shift register bit.
If retentivity is disabled, the shift function restarts at S1 or S8 after a power failure. When
enabled, retentivity always applies to all shift register bits.
Note
The special function shift register can be used only once in the circuit program.

Timing diagram

LOGO!

192

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Setting the Par parameter
View in programming mode:

Press

This special function is not available in parameter assignment mode.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

193

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.26

Analog Multiplexer

Short description
This special function outputs one of four predefined analog values or 0 at the analog output.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

A change in status from 0 to 1 at input En (Enable)
switches a parameterized analog value to the output
AQ, depending on the value of S1 and S2.

Inputs S1 and S2

S1 and S2 (selectors) for selecting the analog value
to be issued.

Parameter

•

S1 = 0 and S2 = 0:
Value 1 is issued

•

S1 = 0 and S2 = 1:
Value 2 is issued

•

S1 = 1 and S2 = 0:
Value 3 is issued

•

S1 = 1 and S2 = 1:
Value 4 is issued

V1...V4: Analog values that will be issued.
Range of values: -32768...+32767
p: Number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3

Output AQ

This special function has an analog output. This output can only be connected with the analog input of a
function, an analog flag or an analog output connector (AQ1, AQ2).
Range of values for AQ:
-32768...+32767

LOGO!

194

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters V1...V4
The analog values for the parameters V1...V4 can be derived from another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. For information on parameter defaults,
refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

Parameter p (number of decimals)
Applies only to the values displayed in a message text.

Timing diagram

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

195

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Functional description
If input En is set, then the function issues one of four possible analog values V1 to V4 at the
output AQ, depending on the value of S1 and S2.
If the input En is not set, then the function issues the analog value 0 at output AQ.

Analog output
If you interconnect this special function with a real analog output, note that the analog output
can only process values between 0 and 1000. To do this, you may need to connect an
additional amplifier between the analog output of the special function and the real analog
output. Using this amplifier, you standardize the output range of the special function to a
value range of 0 to 1000.

Setting the Par parameter
View in programming mode (example):

View in parameter assignment mode:

LOGO!

196

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.27

Analog Ramp

Short description
The Analog Ramp instruction allows the output to be changed from the current level to the
selected level at a specified rate.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input En (Enable) applies the start/stop level (Offset "B" + StSp) to
the output for 100 ms and starts the ramp operation
to the selected level.
A change in the status from 1 to 0 immediately sets
the current level to Offset "B", which makes output
AQ equal to 0.

Input Sel

SeI = 0: Level 1 is selected
SeI = 1: Level 2 is selected
A change in status of Sel causes the current level to
start changing to the selected level at the specified
rate.

Input St

A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input St (Decelerated Stop) causes the current level to decrease at a
constant rate until the start/stop level (Offset "B" +
StSp) is reached. The start/stop level is maintained
for 100ms and then the current level is set to Offset
"B", which makes output AQ equal to 0.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

197

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Parameter

Level 1 and Level 2:
Levels to be reached
Range of values for each level:
-10,000 to +20,000
MaxL:
Maximum value that must not be exceeded under any
circumstances.
Range of values: -10,000 to +20,000
StSp:
Start/Stop offset:: value that is added to Offset "B" to
create the start/stop level. If the Start/Stop offset is 0,
then the start/stop level is Offset "B"..
Range of values:
0 to +20,000
Rate:
Acceleration with which level 1, level 2 or Offset is
reached. Steps/seconds are issued.
Range of values:
1 to 10,000
A: Gain
Range of values:
0 to 10.00
B: Offset
Range of values:
±10,000
p: Number of decimals
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3

Output AQ

The output AQ is scaled using the formula:
Range of values for AQ:
0 to +32767
(Current Level - Offset "B") / Gain "A"
Range of values:
0 to +32767
Note:
When AQ is displayed in parameter mode or message mode, it is displayed as an unscaled value (engineering units: current level).

LOGO!

198

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters L1, L2
The analog values for the parameters L1 and L2 can be derived from another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. For information on parameter defaults,
refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

Parameter p (number of decimals)
Applies only to the AQ, L1, L2, MaxL, StSp and Rate values displayed in a message text.

Timing diagram for AQ

Functional description
If the input En is set, then the function sets the current level to StSp + Offset "B" for 100 ms.
Then, depending on the connection of Sel, the function runs from the level StSp + Offset "B"
to either level 1 or level 2 at the acceleration set in Rate.
If the input St is set, the function runs to a level of StSp + Offset "B" at the acceleration set in
Rate. Then the function holds the level at StSp + Offset "B" for 100 ms. After 100 ms, the
level is set to Offset "B". The scaled value (output AQ) is 0.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

199

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
If the input St is set, the function can only be restarted after the inputs St and En have been
reset.
If input Sel has been changed, depending on the connection of Sel, the function runs from
the current target level to the new target level at the rate that is specified.
If the input En is reset, the function immediately sets the current level to Offset "B".
The current level is updated every 100 ms. Note the relationship between output AQ and the
current level:
Output AQ = (current level - Offset "B" ) / Gain "A"
Note
For further information on analog value processing, please refer to the online help for
LOGO!Soft Comfort.

Setting the Par parameter
View in programming mode (example):

View in parameter assignment mode:

LOGO!

200

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.28

PI controller

Short description
Proportional-action and integral-action controllers. You can use both types of controller
individually or combined.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input A/M

Set the mode of the controller:
1: automatic mode
0: manual mode

Input R

Use the input R to reset the output AQ. As long as
this input is set, the input A/M is disabled.
Output AQ is set to 0.

Input PV

Analog value: process variable, influences the output

Parameter

SP: Set-value assignment
Range of values:
-10,000 to +20,000
KC: Gain
Range of values:
00.00 to 99.99
TI: Integral time
Range of values:
00:01 to 99:59 m
Dir: Action direction of the controller
Range of values:
+ or Mq: Value from AQ with manual mode
Range of values:
0 to 1000
Min: Minimum value for PV
Range of values:
-10,000 to +20,000
Max: Maximum value for PV
Range of values:
-10,000 to +20,000
A: Gain
Range of values:
±10.00
B: Offset
Range of values:
±10,000
p: Number of decimals
Range of values:
0, 1, 2, 3

Output AQ

This special function has an analog output
(= manipulated variable). This output can only be
connected with the analog input of a function, an
analog flag or an analog output connector (AQ1,
AQ2).
Range of values for AQ:
0...1000

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

201

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters SP and Mq
The set-value SP and the value for Mq can be provided by another already-programmed
function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. For information on parameter defaults,
refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

Parameters KC, TI
Please note:
● If parameter KC has value 0, the "P" function (proportional control) will not be executed.
● If parameter TI has value 99:59 m, the "I" function (integral-action control) will not be
executed.

Parameter p (number of decimals)
Applies only to the PV, SP, Min and Max values displayed in a message text.

LOGO!

202

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Timing diagram
The nature, manner and speed with which the AQ changes depend on the parameters KC
and TI. Thus, the course of AQ in the diagram is merely an example. A control action is
continuous; therefore the diagram portrays just an extract.

1. A disturbance causes the PV to drop, as Dir is positioned upwards, AQ increases until PV
corresponds again to SP.
2. A disturbance causes the PV to drop, as Dir is positioned downwards, AQ decreases until
PV corresponds again to SP.
It is not possible to change the direction (Dir) at runtime of the function. The change is
shown here for illustrative purposes only.
3. As AQ is set to 0 by means of the input R, PV changes. This is based on the fact that PV
increases, which on account of Dir = upwards causes AQ to drop.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

203

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Functional description
If the input A/M is set to 0, then the special function issues output AQ with the value that you
set with parameter Mq.
If the input A/M is set to 1, then automatic mode commences. As an integral sum the value
Mq is adopted, the controller function begins the calculations.
Note
For further information on the controller basics, please refer to the online help for LOGO!Soft
Comfort.
The updated value PV is used to calculate in the formulas:

Updated value PV = (PV • gain) + offset
● If the updated value PV = SP, then the special function does not change the value of AQ.
● Dir = upwards (+) (timing diagram numbers 1. and 3.)
– If the updated value PV > SP, then the special function reduces the value of AQ.
– If the updated value PV < SP, then the special function increases the value of AQ.
● Dir = downwards (-) (timing diagram number 2.)
– If the updated value PV > SP, then the special function increases the value of AQ.
– If the updated value PV < SP, then the special function reduces the value of AQ.
With a disturbance, AQ continues to increase / decrease until the updated value PV again
corresponds to SP. The speed with which AQ changes depends on the parameters KC and
TI.
If the input PV exceeds the parameter Max, then the updated value PV is set to the value of
Max. If the PV falls short of the parameter Min, then the updated value PV is set to the value
of Min.
If the input R is set to 1, then the AQ output is reset. As long as R is set, the input A/M is
disabled.

Sampling time
The sampling time is fixed at 500 ms.

Parameter sets
For more information and application examples with application-related parameter sets for
KC, TI and Dir refer to the online help for LOGO!Soft Comfort.

LOGO!

204

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Setting the Par parameter
View in programming mode (example):

View in parameter assignment mode:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

205

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.29

Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)

Short description
The Pulse Width Modulator (PWM) instruction modulates the analog input value Ax to a
pulsed digital output signal. The pulse width is proportional to the analog value Ax.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

A positive edge (0 to 1 transition) at input En enables
the PWM function block.

Input Ax

Analog signal to be modulated to a pulsed digital
output signal.

Parameter

A: Gain
Range of values: ± 10.00
B: Zero offset
Range of values: ± 10,000
T: Periodic time over which the digital output
is modulated
p: Number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3
Min:
Range of values: ±20,000
Max:
Range of values: ±20,000

Output Q

Q is set or reset for the proporition of each time period according to the proportion of the standardized
value Ax to the analog value range.

Parameter T
Note the defaults of the T parameters listed in topic Time response (Page 115).
The periodic time T can be provided by the actual value of another already-programmed
function. You can use the actual value of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (Page 209) (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)
Select the required function by the block number. The timebase is configurable. For
information on valid ranges and parameter defaults, refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.

LOGO!

206

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Parameters p (number of decimals)
Parameter p applies only to the display of the Ax value in a message text

Functional description
The function reads the value of the signal at the analog input Ax.
This value is multiplied by the value of parameter A (gain). Parameter B (offset) is added to
the product, as follows:
(Ax • Gain) + Offset = Actual value Ax
The function block calculates the proportion of the actual value Ax to the range. The block
sets the digital output Q high for the same proportion of the T (periodic time) parameter, and
sets Q low for the remainder of the time period.

Examples with Timing Diagrams
The following examples show how the PWM instruction modulates a digital output signal
from the analog input value:
Example 1
Analog input value: 500 (range 0 ...1000)
Periodic time T: 4 seconds
The digital output of the PWM function is 2 seconds high, 2 seconds low, 2 seconds high, 2
seconds low and continues in that pattern as long as parameter "En" = high.

Example 2
Analog input value: 300 (range 0 ...1000)
Periodic time T: 10 seconds
The digital output of the PWM function is 3 seconds high, 7 seconds low, 3 seconds high, 7
seconds low and continues in that pattern as long as parameter "En" = high.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

207

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Calculation rule
Q = 1, for (Ax - Min)/ (Max - Min) of time period T, when Min < Ax < Max
Q = 0, for PT - [ (Ax - Min) / (Max - Min) ] of periodic time T.
Note: Ax in this calculation refers to the actual value Ax as calculated using the Gain and
Offset.

Setting the Par Parameter
The following illustration shows the view in programming mode that corresponds to the first
example:

Use the
and
keys to navigate to the Min, Max, A, B, T and P parameters. For each digit
and
keys to scroll through value choices. Use the
key to navigate
of a value, use the
key to navigate from the
to the second screen from the last line of the first screen, and the
top line of the second screen to the first screen. Use the OK key to accept changes.
View in parameter assignment mode:

LOGO!

208

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.30

Analog math

Short description
The analog math block calculates the value AQ of an equation formed from the user-defined
operands and operators.
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input En (Enable) enables the analog math function block.

Parameter

V1: First operand value
V2: Second operand value
V3: Third operand value
V4: Fourth operand value
Op1: First operator
Op2: Second operator
Op3: Third operator
Pr1: Priority of first operation
Pr2: Priority of second operation
Pr3: Priority of third operation
Qen→0: 0: Reset value of AQ to 0 when En=0
1: Retain last value of AQ when En=0
p: Number of decimals
Range of values: 0, 1, 2, 3

Output AQ

The output AQ is the result of the equation formed
from the operand values and operators. AQ will be
set to 32767 if a divide by 0 or overflow occurs, and 32768 if a negative overflow (underflow) occurs.

Parameters V1...V4
The analog values for the parameters V1...V4 can be derived from another alreadyprogrammed function. You can use the actual values of the following functions:
● Analog comparator (Page 165) (actual value Ax – Ay)
● Analog threshold trigger (Page 160) (actual value Ax)
● Analog amplifier (Page 173) (actual value Ax)
● Analog multiplexer (Page 194) (actual value AQ)
● Analog ramp (Page 197) (actual value AQ)
● Analog math (actual value AQ)
● PI controller (Page 201) (actual value AQ)
● Up/down counter (Page 151) (actual value Cnt)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

209

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF
Select the required function by the block number. For information on parameter defaults,
refer to the On-delay (Page 123) topic.
Note
If the analog value for parameter V1, V2, V3 or V4 is derived from another alreadyprogrammed function whose actual value exceeds the value range for V1 ... V4, LOGO! will
display the limit value: -32768 if the value is less than the lower range or 32767 if the value is
greater than the upper range).

Parameters p (number of decimals)
Parameter p applies only to the display of Value1, Value2, Value3, Value4 and AQ in a
message text.

Functional Description
The analog math function combines the four operands and three operators to form an
equation. The operator can be any one of the four standard operators: +, -, *, or /. For each
operator, you must set a unique priority of High (H), Medium (M), or Low (L). The high
operation will be performed first, followed by the medium operation, and then by the low
operation. You must have exactly one operation of each priority. The operand values can
reference another previously-defined function to provide the value. The analog math function
rounds the result to the nearest integer value.
The number of operand values is fixed at four and the number of operators is fixed at 3. If
you need to use fewer operands, use constructions such as + 0 or * 1 to fill the remaining
parameters.
You can also configure the behavior of the function when the Enable parameter En=0. The
function block can either retain its last value, or be set to 0. If the parameter Qen → 0 = 0,
then the function sets AQ to 0 when En=0. If the parameter Qen → 0 = 1, then the function
leaves AQ at its last value when En=0.

Possible errors: Zero division and overflow
If the analog math function block execution results in zero division or overflow, it sets internal
bits that indicate the type of error that occurred. You can program an analog math error
detection function block in your circuit program to detect these errors, and to control the
program behavior as needed. You program one analog math error detection function block to
reference one specific analog math function block.

LOGO!

210

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Examples
The following tables show some simple example analog math block parameters, and the
resulting equations and output values:
V1

Op1
(Pr1)

V2

Op2
(Pr2)

V3

Op3
(Pr3)

V4

12

+ (M)

6

/ (H)

3

- (L)

1

Equation: (12 + (6 / 3)) - 1
Result: 13

V1

Op1
(Pr1)

V2

Op2
(Pr2)

V3

Op3
(Pr3)

V4

2

+ (L)

3

* (M)

1

+ (H)

4

Equation: 2 + (3 * (1 + 4))
Result: 17

V1

Op1
(Pr1)

V2

Op2
(Pr2)

V3

Op3
(Pr3)

V4

100

- (H)

25

/ (L)

2

+ (M)

1

Equation: (100 - 25) / (2 + 1)
Result: 25

Setting the Par parameter
The following illustration shows the view in programming mode that corresponds to the first
example (12 + (6 / 3)) - 1:

Use the
and
keys to navigate between the operand value, operator, and operation
and
keys to scroll through value choices for each
priority. To change a value, use the
key to navigate from one screen to the previous screen when the cursor is
value. Use the
key to navigate to the next screen from the PR1..PR3 line. Use
on the V1..V4 line, and the
the OK key to accept changes.
LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

211

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

4.4.31

Analog math error detection

Short description
The analog math error detection block sets an output if an error has occurred in the
referenced analog math function block (Page 209).
Symbol in LOGO!

Wiring

Description

Input En

A change in the status from 0 to 1 at input En (Enable) enables the analog math error detection block.

Input R

A signal at input R resets the output.

Parameter

MathBN: block number of an analog math instruction
Err: ZD: Divide by 0 error
OF: Overflow error
ZD/OF: (Divide by 0 error) OR
(Overflow error)
AutoRst: Reset the output before the next execution
of the analog math error function block. Y = yes; N =
no

Output Q

Q is set high if the error to detect occurred in the last
exectution referenced analog math function block

Parameter MathBN
The value for the MathBN parameter references be the block number of an alreadyprogrammed analog math function block.

Functional description
The analog math error detection block sets the output when the referenced analog math
function block has an error. You can program the function to set the output on a zero division
error, an overflow error, or when either type of error occurs.
If AutoRst is set, the output is reset prior to the next execution of the function block. If
AutoRst is not set, then whenever the output is set it remains set until the analog math error
detection block is reset with the R parameter. This way, even if the error subsequently
clears, the circuit program still has knowledge that an error did occur at some point.
In any scan cycle, if the referenced analog math function block executes before the analog
math error detection function block, the error is detected in the same scan cycle. if the
referenced analog math function block executes after the analog math error detection
function block, the error is detected in the next scan cycle

LOGO!

212

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

Analog math error detection logic table
In the table below, Err represents the parameter of the analog math error detection
instruction that selects which type of error to detect. ZD represents the zero division bit set
by the analog math instruction at the end of its execution: 1 if the error occurred, 0 if not. OF
represents the overflow bit set by the analog math instruction: 1 if the error occurred, 0 if not.
The ZD/OF Err parameter represents the logical OR of the zero division bit and overflow bit
of the referenced analog math instruction. Q represents the output of the analog math error
detection function. An "x" indicates that the bit can be either 0 or 1 with no influence on the
output.
Err

ZD

OF

Q

ZD

1

x

1

ZD

0

x

0

OF

x

1

1

OF

x

0

0

ZD/OF

1

0

1

ZD/OF

0

1

1

ZD/OF

1

1

1

ZD/OF

0

0

0

If the MathBN parameter is null, then the output Q is always 0.

Setting the Par parameter

The parameters MathBN, AutoRst, and Err can be set in programming mode or parameter
assignment mode.
View in programming mode (example):

Use the
and
keys to navigate between the MathBN, AutoRst, and Err parameters. To
and
keys to scroll through value choices for each value. Use
change a value, use the
the OK key to accept changes.
View in parameter assignment mode (example):

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

213

LOGO! functions
4.4 Special functions list - SF

LOGO!

214

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Configuring LOGO!

5

Parameter assignment refers to the configuration of the block parameters. You can set delay
times for time functions, the switching times of timers, counter threshold values, the
monitoring interval of an hours counter, the on and off thresholds of the trigger, and more.
You can configure the parameters
● In programming mode
● In parameter assignment mode
In programming mode, the author of the circuit program also sets the parameters
Parameter assignment mode allows the editing of parameters without having to modify the
circuit program. This feature is available so that you can edit parameters without having to
change to programming mode. The advantage: The circuit program remains protected, but
can be adapted by the user to meet specific requirements.

Note
In parameter assignment mode, LOGO! continues execution of the circuit program.

5.1

Selecting parameter assignment mode
Press ESC to change from RUN to parameter assignment mode:

Note
The following applies to earlier device versions up to 0BA2: you open parameter assignment
mode by pressing ESC+OK.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

215

Configuring LOGO!
5.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode
LOGO! changes to parameter assignment mode and opens the parameter assignment
menu:

Description of the four menu items of the parameter assignment menu
● Stop
You select this command to stop your circuit program and thus change to the main menu of
programming mode. To do so:
1. To move the '>' cursor to 'Stop': Press

or

2. To confirm 'Stop': Press OK

3. To move the '>' cursor to 'Yes': Press

or

4. To confirm 'Yes': Press OK
LOGO! shows the main menu of the programming mode:

● Set Param
For information on the various parameters, refer to the topics "Parameters (Page 217)",
"Selecting the parameters (Page 218)", and "Modifying parameters (Page 219)".
● Set..
For information on the various settings, refer to the topic "Setting the default values for
LOGO!".
● Prg Name
This menu command only allows you to read the name of your circuit program. It is not
possible to modify this name in parameter assignment mode (Page 75).

LOGO!

216

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Configuring LOGO!
5.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

5.1.1

Parameters
Note
In the following discourse on parameters, we presume that the respective default parameter
mode ("+") has been maintained. This is a prerequisite for viewing and editing parameters in
the parameter assignment mode! See the "Parameter protection (Page 117)" topic and the
"Synchronization (Page 96)" topic.
Parameters are, for example:
● The delay times of a timer relay.
● The switching times (cams) of a timer switch.
● Counter thresholds
● The monitoring time for hour counters
● The trigger thresholds.
Each one of the parameters is identified by its block number (Bx) and the shortname of the
parameter. Examples:
● T: ...is a configurable time.
● MI: ...is a configurable time interval.
Note
LOGO!Soft Comfort also allows you to assign names to blocks (for more information,
refer to the chapter entitled "LOGO! Software".

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

217

Configuring LOGO!
5.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

5.1.2

Selecting the parameters
To select a parameter:
1. On the parameter assignment menu, select
'Set Param': Press or

2. Confirm with OK.
LOGO! shows the first parameter. If no parameter can be set, you can press ESC to
return to the parameter assignment menu.

3. Now, select the desired parameter: Press

or

4. Select the parameter you want to edit, and press OK.

LOGO!

218

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Configuring LOGO!
5.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

5.1.3

Modifying parameters
You first select the parameter you want to edit (Page 218).
You change the value of the parameter in the same way as you did in programming mode:
1. Move the cursor to the point at which you want to make the change:
Press
or
2. To change this value: Press

or

3. To apply the value: OK

Note
When changing the time parameter when the system is in RUN, you can also change the
timebase (s=seconds, m=minutes, h=hours). This does not apply if the time parameter
represents the result of another function (for an example, see the "On-delay (Page 123)"
topic). In this case you can neither change the value nor the timebase. The current time is
reset to zero when you change the timebase.

Current value of a time T
View of a time T in parameter assignment mode:

You can change the configured time T.

Current timer value
View of a timer cam in parameter assignment mode:

You can change the on/off times and the day.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

219

Configuring LOGO!
5.1 Selecting parameter assignment mode

Current value of a counter
View of a counter parameter in parameter assignment mode:

You can change the on/off threshold. This does not apply if the on or off threshold represents
the result of another function (in the "Up/down counter (Page 151)" topic, this is B021).

Current value of an hour counter
View of an hour counter parameter in parameter assignment mode:

You can edit the configured time interval MI.

Current value of a threshold trigger
View of the parameter of a threshold trigger in parameter assignment mode:

You can change the on/off threshold.

LOGO!

220

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Configuring LOGO!
5.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

5.2

Setting the default values for LOGO!
You can set the following default values for a LOGO! Basic:

Clock settings
You can set the default values for time-of-day and date (Page 222) , summertime/wintertime
conversion (Page 93) and synchronization (Page 96):
● in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu ("Clock" menu item)
● in programming mode by means of the setup menu ("Clock" menu item).

Contrast and backlight settings
You can set the default values for the display contrast and backlight (Page 223):
● in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu ("LCD" menu item)
● in programming mode by means of the setup menu ("LCD" menu item).

Menu Language
You can set the language (Page 224) in which the LOGO! menus will be displayed:
● in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu ("Menu Lang" menu item)
● in programming mode by means of the setup menu ("Menu Lang" menu item)

Number of Base Module Analog Inputs
The LOGO! Base Modules LOGO! 24, LOGO! 24o, LOGO! 24C, LOGO! 24Co, LOGO!
12/24RC and LOGO! 12/24RCo support four analog inputs. Formerly they supported two.
You can choose whether to use two or four analog inputs (Page 225) on these modules:
● in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu ("BM AI NUM" menu item)
● in programming mode by means of the setup menu ("BM AI NUM" menu item)

Start screen settings
You can select the default setting for the start screen (Page 226) that displays on LOGO!
and the LOGO! TD when LOGO! transitions to RUN mode:
● in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu ("StartScreen" menu item)

Message Text settings
You can select settings that apply to all message text function blocks (Page 178) from the
Programming menu.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

221

Configuring LOGO!
5.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

5.2.1

Setting the time of day and date (LOGO! ... C)
You can set the time of day and the date
● in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu ("Clock" menu item)
● in programming mode by means of the setup menu ("Clock" menu item)

To set the time of day and the date in parameter assignment mode:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 215).
2. On the parameter assignment menu, select 'Set..': Press

or

3. Confirm 'Set..': Press OK
4. Move the '>' cursor to 'Clock': Press

or

5. Confirm 'Clock': Press OK
6. Move the '>' cursor to 'Set Clock': Press

or

7. Apply 'Set Clock': Press OK
Note
The 'Set Clock' command is only executed if your LOGO! is equipped with a real-time
clock (LOGO!..C). You set the real-time clock of LOGO! by means of the 'Set Clock'
command.
LOGO! shows the following display.

8. Select the day of the week: Press

or

9. Move the cursor to the next position: Press
10.To change the value: Press

or

or

11.To set the correct time of day, repeat steps 9. and 10.
12.To set the correct date, repeat steps 9. and 10.
13.To confirm your entries: Press OK

LOGO!

222

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Configuring LOGO!
5.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

To set the time of day and the date in programming mode:
If you want to set the time of day and the date in programming mode, select 'Setup' in the
main menu, then menus 'Clock' and 'Set Clock'. You can now set the weekday and the time
as described earlier (as of step 8.).

5.2.2

Setting the display contrast and backlight choice
You can set the default value for the display contrast
● in parameter assignment mode by means of the set menu "LCD" menu item)
● in programming mode by means of the setup menu ("LCD" menu item).

To set the display contrast in parameter assignment mode:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 215).
2. On the parameter assignment menu,
select 'Set': Press or
3. Confirm 'Set..': Press OK
4. On the Set menu, select 'LCD': Press

or

5. Confirm 'LCD..': Press OK
6. By default, the cursor points to Contrast.
If not, move the '>' cursor to 'Contrast': Press

or

7. Confirm 'Contrast': Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:

8. To change the display contrast: Press

or

9. To confirm your entry: Press OK

To set the display contrast in programming mode:
If you want to set the display contrast in programming mode, select 'Setup' in the main
menu, then menu 'Contrast'. You can now set the display contrast as described earlier (as of
step 8.).

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

223

Configuring LOGO!
5.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

To set the backlight choice in parameter assignment mode:
1. Select parameter assignment mode.
2. On the parameter assignment menu,
select 'Set': Press or
3. Confirm 'Set..': Press OK
4. On the Set menu, select 'LCD': Press

or

5. Confirm 'LCD..': Press OK
6. Move the '>' cursor to 'BackLight': Press

or

7. Confirm 'BackLight': Press OK
8. Move the '>' cursor to 'Default' or 'AlwaysOn': Press

or

The default is that the backlight is not on. To set the backlight to always be on, select the
'AlwaysOn' choice.

To set the backlight choice in programming mode:
If you want to set the backlight choice in programming mode, select 'Setup' in the main
menu, then menu 'LCD'. You can now set the backlight choice as described earlier (as of
step 6.).
Note: The backlight lifetime of the LOGO! TD is 20,000 hours.

5.2.3

Setting the menu language
The language of the LOGO! menus can be one of ten predefined languages:
CN (Chinese)

DE (German)

EN (English)

ES (Spanish)

FR (French)

IT (Italian)

NL (Dutch)

RU (Russian)

TR (Turkish)

JP (Japanese)

To set the menu language in parameter assignment mode:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 215).
2. On the parameter assignment menu,
select 'Set': Press or
3. Confirm 'Set..': Press OK
4. On the Set menu, select 'Menu Lang': Press

or

5. Confirm 'Menu Lang': Press OK
6. Move the '>' cursor to the language
or
of your choice: Press
7. Confirm language selection. Press OK

LOGO!

224

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Configuring LOGO!
5.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

To set the menu language in programming mode:
If you want to set the menu language in programming mode, select 'Setup' in the main menu,
then menu 'Menu Lang'. You can now set the menu language as described earlier (as of
step 6.).

To reset LOGO! to its default language setting:
If you want to restore LOGO! to its default language setting (English), do the following:
1. Switch off LOGO! and then switch it on again.
2. When an hourglass icon displays, press
entries appear.

5.2.4

,

and OK together until the English menu

Setting the number of AIs in the LOGO! Basic
LOGO! 12/24RC/RCo, LOGO! 24/24o and LOGO! 24C/24Co support up to four onboard
inputs that can be used as either digital or analog inuts (0 ...10V). Inputs I7 (AI1) and I8 (AI2)
are available as analog inputs by default, whether you use them or not. Inputs I1 (AI3) and I2
(AI4) are optional analog inputs. A LOGO! Basic provides a menu where you can choose to
use two analog inputs (the default, AI1 and AI2), or four. Regardless of the settings, inputs I1
and I2 can be used as digital inputs. To use them as analog inputs AI3 and AI4, you must set
the 'BM AI NUM' to four. Note that the number of configured analog inputs on the LOGO!
Basic affects the subsequent numbering of analog inputs on attached expansion modules
(See the "Maximum setup (Page 27)" topic).

To set the number of AIs in parameter assignment mode:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 215).
2. On the parameter assignment menu,
select 'Set': Press or
3. Confirm 'Set..': Press OK
4. On the Set menu, select 'BM AI NUM': Press

or

5. Confirm 'BM AI NUM': Press OK
6. Move to '2AI' or '4AI': Press

or

7. Confirm selection. Press OK

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

225

Configuring LOGO!
5.2 Setting the default values for LOGO!

To set the number of AIs in programming mode:
If you want to set the number of AIs in programming mode, select 'Setup' in the main menu,
then menu 'BM AI NUM'. You can now set the number of AIs as described earlier (as of step
6.).
Note
If you change the number of analog inputs, LOGO! restarts automatically.

5.2.5

Setting the start screen
You can select the default setting for the start screen that LOGO! and the LOGO! TD will
display in RUN mode. You make this selection from the parameter assignment mode by
means of the set menu ("StartScreen" menu item).

To select the start screen:
1. Select parameter assignment mode (Page 215).
2. On the parameter assignment menu,
or
select 'Set..': Press
3. Confirm 'Set..': Press OK
4. Move to 'StartScreen': Press

or

Confirm 'StartScreen': Press OKLOGO! shows the following display:

The current setting of the start screen is shown in the bottom row. The default setting is
'Clock'.
You can choose between the display of the current time-of-day and date, or the values of
the digital inputs:
5. Select the desired default setting: Press

or

6. To confirm your entry: Press OK
LOGO! displays your selection.
Power the LOGO! Basic off then on to make your changes take effect. When LOGO! is in
RUN mode, both LOGO! and the LOGO! TD will display the start screen that you selected.

LOGO!

226

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! memory and battery cards

6

LOGO! provides the following cards for program storage and real-time clock backup:
● LOGO! Memory Card
● LOGO! Battery Card
● LOGO! Memory/Battery Card
Each of the three cards is color-coded to make them easily distinguishable from one another.
They also vary in size. The LOGO! Memory Card (purple) provides storage for the circuit
program. The LOGO! Battery Card (green) provides battery backup of the real-time clock for
up to two years. The LOGO! Memory/Battery card (brown) provides both circuit program
storage and battery backup of the real-time clock.
WARNING
Risk of death, personal injury or property damage can occur if you use the battery card or
combined memory/battery card in a hazardous location.
Use the battery card or combined memory/battery card only in non-hazardous locations.
The LOGO! 0BA6 Memory Card and the LOGO! 0BA6 Memory/Battery Card provide 32
Kbytes memory space: four times the memory space of the LOGO! 0BA5 Memory Card.
LOGO! allows you to store only one circuit program in its memory. If you want to modify the
circuit program or create an additional one without deleting the first, you must archive it
somewhere.
You can copy the LOGO! circuit program to a LOGO! Memory Card or LOGO!
Memory/Battery card. You can then insert this card in another LOGO! in order to copy the
circuit program. This enables you to manage your programs in the following ways:
● Archive circuit programs
● Reproduce circuit programs
● Send circuit programs by mail
● Write and test your circuit program at the office, and then transfer it to a LOGO! in the
switching cabinet
LOGO! is supplied with a hood. The LOGO! Memory Card, LOGO! Battery Card and LOGO!
Memory/Battery Card are supplied separately.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

227

LOGO! memory and battery cards

Note
You do not need a memory card or combined memory/battery card to backup the circuit
program in your LOGO!
The LOGO! circuit program is automatically stored in nonvolatile memory when you exit the
programming mode.
The memory card or combined memory/battery card can backup all data in the LOGO! circuit
program memory. The order numbers are found in the Appendix section entitled "Order
numbers (Page 285)".

Compatability (Old memory cards in newer LOGO! modules)
Data written to the memory card in an 0BA5 version can be read in all 0BA6 versions. 0BA4
memory cards cannot be read by 0BA6 versions.
A memory card that contains data written in earlier versions (0BA0...0BA3 devices) cannot
be used in LOGO! devices of the 0BA4 and later generations. When the LOGO! system
detects such an 'old' memory card, the message "Unknown Card / Press ESC" is output to
the display.
Vice versa, an 0BA4 or later memory card cannot be used in LOGO! devices of the
0BA0...0BA3 family.

Compatibility (New memory, battery, or combined memory/battery cards in older LOGO! modules)
The LOGO! 0BA6 memory card can be used in 0BA4 or 0BA5 devices to store a circuit
program but cannot be used in 0BA0..0BA3 devices.
A LOGO! 0BA6 Memory Card or LOGO! 0BA6 Memory/Battery Card that already has a
LOGO! 0BA6 circuit program stored on it cannot be used in any device other than a LOGO!
0BA6 device.
A LOGO! 0BA6 Battery Card or LOGO! 0BA6 Memory/Battery Card can only be used in
0BA6 devices.

Upward compatibility of circuit programs
Circuit programs written for the previous versions 0BA0...0BA5 can be transferred to 0BA6
units from LOGO!Soft Comfort.

LOGO!

228

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! memory and battery cards
6.1 Security function (CopyProtect)

6.1

Security function (CopyProtect)
The secuirty function provides copy protection for circuit programs on memory cards or
combined memory/battery cards.

Unprotected memory cards
You can edit circuit programs without restrictions and exchange data between the memory
card or combined memory/battery card and the device.

Protected memory cards
A circuit program is protected when it is transferred from a protected program memory card
or combined memory/battery card to LOGO!.
To execute this circuit program in LOGO!, the protected card must remain inserted during
RUN; that is, the circuit program stored on the card cannot be copied to other LOGO!
devices.
In addition, a protected circuit program is write-protected.
A circuit program with password protection is no longer protected after the correct password
has been entered; that is, you can then edit the program and remove the memory card or
combined memory/battery card.
Note
When you create the circuit program for a memory card or combined memory/battery card,
you need to assign a password (Page 76) to be able to edit it at a later time.

Correlation between the password and the protective function
Password

Protection

Editing

Copying

Deleting

-

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

-

Yes, with password

Yes

Yes, with password

-

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes, with password

Yes, with password

Yes, with password

Assigning a security function
To assign a circuit program and copy protection function to the memory card or combined
memory/battery card, open the programming mode and select "Card".
1. Switch LOGO! to programming mode (ESC / >Stop).
2. Select the 'Card' command: Press

or

3. To apply 'Card': Press OK
4. Move the '>' cursor to 'CopyProtect': Press

or

5. To apply 'CopyProtect': Press OK
LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

229

LOGO! memory and battery cards
6.1 Security function (CopyProtect)
LOGO! shows the following display:

The current protection setting is shown in the bottom line. This function is disabled by default
("No": disabled).

Enabling the security function
To set the security function:
1. Move the '>' cursor to 'Yes': Press

or

2. Confirm 'Yes': Press OK
LOGO! shows the following display:

Note
This only generates a circuit program and copy protection for the memory card or combined
memory/battery card; the circuit program itself must be copied (Page 233) separately from
LOGO! to the memory card or combined memory/battery card. (This copy can be done at
power-on.)
You can always change the "No" status (security function disabled) to "Yes" (security
function enabled).
A status change from "Yes" (security function enabled) to "No" (security function disabled) is
only possible if the memory card or combined memory/battery card does not contain a circuit
program.

LOGO!

230

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! memory and battery cards
6.2 Inserting and removing memory and battery cards

6.2

Inserting and removing memory and battery cards
When you remove a memory card or combined memory/battery card that contains a circuit
program with copy protection attributes, note the following: The circuit program stored on the
card can only be executed if the card remains inserted during system runtime.
After you have removed the memory card or combined memory/battery card, LOGO! outputs
the message 'No Program'. A removal of the card during RUN will lead to impermissible
operating states.
Always heed the following warning:
WARNING
Do not touch the open slot of the memory card with your fingers or with a metallic or
conductive object.
The memory card socket might be under voltage if the polarity is accidentally reversed at
L1 and N.
The memory card, battery card or combined memory/battery card must only be removed by
qualified personnel.

Removing the memory card, battery card or combined memory/battery card
To remove the memory card, carefully insert a screwdriver with a 3-mm blade into the
groove on the upper end of the card, and lever the module partially out of the slot. You can
now remove the memory card.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

231

LOGO! memory and battery cards
6.2 Inserting and removing memory and battery cards
To remove a battery card, or combined memory/battery card, slide a screwdriver with a 3mm blade into the slot on the upper surface of the card until it engages in the back, then with
the screwdriver engaged, pull the card out with your hand.

Inserting a memory card, battery card or combined memory/battery card
The entry of the memory card, battery card and the combined memory/battery card slot is
chamfered on its bottom right. The edge of the cards is chamfered accordingly. This
encoding prevents you from inserting cards the wrong way. Insert the memory card, battery
card or combined memory/battery card into the slot and push it in until it engages.

LOGO!

232

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! memory and battery cards
6.3 Copying data from LOGO! to the memory card

6.3

Copying data from LOGO! to the memory card
To copy the circuit program to the memory card or combined memory/battery card:
1. Insert the memory card or combined memory/battery card into the slot.
2. Switch LOGO! to programming mode (ESC / >Stop).

3. The main menu opens. To select the 'Card' command: Press

or

4. Press OK. The transfer menu opens.

5. Move the '>' cursor to 'LOGO → Card' (if required): Press

or

6. Press OK.
LOGO! now copies the circuit program to the memory card or combined memory/battery
card. (If the memorycard is from an incompatible 0BA0..0BA4 version, LOGO! displays this
message: "Card unknown/ Press ESC".)
When LOGO! has finished copying, it automatically returns you to the main menu:

The circuit program backup is now stored on your memory card or combined memory/battery
card and you can remove the card. Do not forget to replace the cap.
If power fails while LOGO! is copying the circuit program, repeat the process after Power On.
Note
The password of a protected circuit program in LOGO! also applies to the copied program
version on your memory card or combined memory/battery card.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

233

LOGO! memory and battery cards
6.4 Copying data from the memory card to LOGO!

6.4

Copying data from the memory card to LOGO!
You can copy a circuit program from a compatible memory card or combined
memory/battery card to LOGO! in one of two ways:
● Automatically during the startup of LOGO! (POWER ON)
● By means of the "Card" menu of LOGO!
Note
If the program on the module/card is protected with a password, the copied program in
LOGO! is also protected with the same password.

Automatic copying during the startup of LOGO!
Proceed as follows:
1. Switch off the power supply to LOGO! (POWER OFF)
2. Remove the slot cover.
3. Insert the program module/card into the relevant slot.
4. Switch on the power supply to LOGO!
LOGO! copies the program from the program module/card to LOGO!. (If the memorycard
is from an incompatible 0BA0..0BA3 version, LOGO! displays this message: "Unknown
Card / Press ESC".)
When LOGO! has finished copying, it opens the main menu:

Note
Before you switch LOGO! to RUN, you must ensure that the system you are controlling
with LOGO! does not represent a source of hazard.
5. Move the '>' cursor to 'Start': Press

or

6. Press OK.

LOGO!

234

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! memory and battery cards
6.4 Copying data from the memory card to LOGO!

Copying by means of the "Card" menu
For information on the replacement of a memory card or combined memory/battery card,
also note the information in the topic "Inserting and removing memory and battery cards
(Page 231)".
To copy a program from the memory card or combined memory/battery card to LOGO!:
1. Insert the memory card or combined memory/battery card
2. Switch LOGO! to programming mode (ESC / >Stop).

3. Move the '>' cursor to 'Card': Press

or

4. Press OK. The transfer menu opens.
5. Move the '>' cursor to 'Card → LOGO': Press

or

6. Press OK.
LOGO! copies the circuit program from the memory card or combined memory/battery card
to LOGO!. (If the memory card is from an incompatible 0BA0..0BA3 version, LOGO! displays
this message: "Unknown Card / Press ESC".)
When LOGO! has finished copying, it automatically returns to the main menu.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

235

LOGO! memory and battery cards
6.4 Copying data from the memory card to LOGO!

LOGO!

236

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! software
7.1

7

LOGO! software
LOGO!Soft Comfort is available as a programming package for the PC. This software
provides many features, for example:
● A graphic interface for offline creation of your circuit program by means of Ladder
Diagram (contact chart / circuit diagram) or Function Block Diagram (function chart)
● Simulation of your circuit program on the PC
● Generating and printing of an overview chart for the circuit program
● Saving a backup of the circuit program on the hard drive or other media
● Comparing circuit programs
● Easy configuration of blocks
● Transferring the circuit program in both directions:
– from LOGO! to the PC
– from the PC to LOGO!
● Reading the values of the hour counter
● Setting the time of day
● Summertime/wintertime conversion
● Online test: Display of status changes and process variables of LOGO! in RUN mode:
– Status of a digital I/O, flags, shift register bits and cursor keys
– The values of all analog I/O and flags
– The results of all blocks
– The current values (including the times) of selected blocks
● Starting and stopping circuit program execution via the PC (RUN, STOP)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

237

LOGO! software
7.1 LOGO! software

The LOGO! alternatives
As you can see, LOGO!Soft Comfort represents an alternative to conventional engineering
methods, with several advantages:
● You can develop the circuit program on your PC.
● You simulate the circuit program on your computer and verify its functions before you
actually implement it in your system.
● You can add comments to the circuit program and create hard copies.
● You can save a copy of your circuit program to the file system on your PC, to make it
directly available for modifications.
● It takes only a few key actions to download the circuit program to LOGO!.

LOGO!Soft Comfort
LOGO!Soft Comfort runs under Windows Vista®, Windows 98®, Windows NT 4.0®, Windows
Me®, Windows 2000®, Windows XP®, Linux®, and Mac OS X®. LOGO!Soft Comfort is capable
of client/server operation and offers you a high degree of freedom and comfort for creating
your circuit program.

LOGO!Soft Comfort V6.1
This is the current version of LOGO!Soft Comfort. You will find all the functions and the
functionality of the devices described in this manual in the Version 6.1.

Upgrading previous LOGO!Soft Comfort versions
You can use the Help → Update Center menu command in LOGO!Soft Comfort V6.1 to
upgrade LOGO!Soft Comfort V1.0, V2.0, V3.0, V4.0 or V5.0 to V6.1.
Order numbers are found in the Appendix topic "Order numbers".
Note
If a full version is not installed, you can carry out an upgrade as follows:
• Install the new software from the CD.
• When the system prompts you for the previous version, place the old LOGO!Soft Comfort
CD in the CD drive.
• Point your browser to the "...\Tools\Application" directory on the CD.

Updates and info
You can download demo versions of the software free of charge from the Internet address
specified in the preface.
For detailed information on updates, upgrades and the LOGO!Soft Comfort Update Center,
refer to the LOGO!Soft Comfort online help.

LOGO!

238

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! software
7.2 Connecting LOGO! to a PC

7.2

Connecting LOGO! to a PC

Connecting the PC cable
To connect LOGO! to a PC, you need the LOGO! PC cable. See the Appendix "Order
numbers (Page 285)".
Turn the power off to the LOGO! Base Module. Remove the cap, memory card, or combined
memory/battery card from your LOGO! and connect the cable to this socket. Connect the
other end of the cable to the serial port of your PC.

Connecting the USB PC cable
You can also connect LOGO! to the PC with the LOGO! USB PC cable. For the cable's order
number, refer to the Appendix "Order numbers (Page 285)".
Remove the cap or memory card, battery card, or combined memory/battery card from your
LOGO! and connect the cable to this socket. Connect the other end of the cable to a USB
port of your PC.

Switching LOGO! to PC ↔ LOGO! mode
Switch the LOGO! with/without display to STOP from your PC (refer to the LOGO!Soft
Comfort online help), or select the ESC / >Stop command on a device with display and
confirm the entry with 'Yes'.
When LOGO! is in STOP and online with the PC, the following PC commands are accepted:
● Switch LOGO! to RUN
● Read/write the circuit program
● Read/write the summertime/wintertime
When you start the upload/download in STOP, the following display appears automatically:

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

239

LOGO! software
7.2 Connecting LOGO! to a PC

Note
You can switch earlier versions up to 0BA3 with/without display to PC ↔ LOGO mode as
follows:
1. Switch off the power supply to LOGO!.
2. Remove the cover or the memory, battery, or combined memory/battery card and connect
the cable to this socket.
3. Switch on power.
LOGO! switches automatically to PC ↔ LOGO mode.
The PC can now access LOGO! For information on this function, refer to the LOGO!Soft
Comfort Online Help.
For more information on LOGO! versions without display, refer to the Appendix topic "LOGO!
without display ("LOGO! Pure") (Page 277)".

Closing the PC ↔ LOGO! mode
When the data transfer is completed, the connection to the PC is shut down automatically.
Note
If the circuit program created with LOGO!Soft Comfort is password protected, both the circuit
program and the password are downloaded to LOGO!. The password prompt is enabled at
the end of the data transfer.
The upload of a password protected program created in LOGO! is only possible after the
correct password is entered in LOGO!Soft Comfort.

LOGO!

240

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Applications

8

Note
LOGO! sample applications are available to all our customers free of charge on the Siemens
LOGO! website (http://www.siemens.com/logo) (go to Products & Solutions → Applications →
Application Examples).
The examples provided are not guaranteed to be error-free; they serve as general
information about the fields of application for LOGO!, and may be different from user-specific
solutions. Siemens reserves the right to make changes.
The user operates the system at his own responsibility. For safety concerns, refer to the
relevant national standards and system-related installation regulations.
On the Internet you can find the following sample applications, tips for further applications,
and more:
● Irrigation system for greenhouse plants
● Conveyor control system
● Bending machine control system
● Shop window lighting
● Bell system (e.g., in a school)
● Parking lot surveillance
● Outdoor lighting
● Shutter control system
● Domestic outdoor and indoor lighting system
● Control system of a cream stirrer
● Sports hall lighting
● Constant load on 3 consumers
● Sequential control system for cable-welding machines for large cross–sections
● Step switch (e.g., for fans)
● Sequential control for boilers
● Control system for several pump sets with centralized operator control
● Cutting device (e.g., for detonating fuses)
● Monitoring periods of utilization, for example of a solar energy system
● Intelligent foot switches, for example, for speed preselection)
● Elevating platform controls
● Impregnation of textiles, heating and conveyor belt controls
LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

241

Applications

● Silo-filling system
● Fill station with message text on the LOGO! TD that displays the sum of counted objects
On the Web you can also find descriptions and the corresponding circuit diagrams of the
applications. You can read these *.pdf files with the Adobe Acrobat Reader. If you have
installed LOGO!Soft Comfort on your computer, you can simply click the disk icon to
download the relevant circuit programs, which you can then adapt to suit your application
and download to LOGO! directly via the PC cable.

Benefits of LOGO!
LOGO! is a particularly useful feature:
● For replacing auxiliary switchgear with the integrated LOGO! functions
● For saving wiring and installation work - because LOGO! keeps the wiring "in its head."
● For reducing space requirements for components in the control cabinet/distribution box. A
smaller control cabinet/distribution box may provide sufficient space.
● For adding or changing functions, without having to install additional switchgear or
change the wiring.
● For offering your customers new, additional functions for domestic and commercial
housing installations. Examples:
– Domestic security systems: LOGO! switches on a lamp at regular intervals or opens
and closes the shutters while you are on holiday.
– Central heating: LOGO! runs the circulation pump only when water or heating is
actually required.
– Refrigerating systems: LOGO! can defrost refrigerating systems at regular intervals to
save energy costs.
– You can illuminate aquaria and terraria on a time-dependent basis.
Last but not least, you can:
● Use commonly available switches and pushbuttons, which makes it easy to install a
domestic system.
● Connect LOGO! directly to your domestic installation; the integrated power supply makes
it possible.

LOGO!

242

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Applications

Do you want more Info?
For more information about LOGO!, see the Siemens web page (as mentioned in the first
paragraph of the Note in this chapter).

Do you have any suggestions?
There are definitely many more useful applications for LOGO!. If you know of one, please
write to the following address or send it to the online Support Request
(http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request). Siemens will collect all the
suggestions made and distribute as many of them as possible. Your suggestions are
valuable to Siemens.
Write to:
Siemens AG
A&D AS FA PS4
PO box 48 48
D-90327 Nuremberg

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

243

Applications

LOGO!

244

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

A

Technical data
A.1

General technical data
Criterion

Tested in accordance with

Values

LOGO! Base Modules
72 x 90 x 55 mm
Approx. 190 g
on a 35 mm profile rail 4 module widths or wall mounting

(LOGO! Basic or LOGO! Pure)
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
Installation
LOGO! expansion modules
DM8..., AM...
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
Installation

36 x 90 x 53 mm
Approx. 90 g
on a 35 mm profile rail 2 module widths or wall mounting

LOGO! TD (Text Display)

128.2 x 86 x 38.7 mm
Approx. 220g
Bracket mounting

LOGO! expansion modules DM16...
Dimensions (WxHxD)
Weight
Installation

72 x 90 x 53 mm
Approx. 190 g
on a 35 mm profile rail 4 module widths or wall mounting

Climatic conditions
Ambient temperature
Horizontal installation
Vertical installation

Low temperature to IEC
60068-2-1
High temperature to IEC
60068-2-2

Storage/shipping
Relative humidity

0 ... 55 °C
- 40 °C... +70 °C

IEC 60068-2-30

Air pressure
Pollutants

0 ... 55 °C

From 10 to 95 % no condensation
795 ... 1080 hPa

IEC 60068-2-42

SO2 10 cm3 /m3, 10 days

IEC 60068-2-43

H2S 1 cm3 /m3, 10 days

Ambient mechanical conditions
Degree of protection

IP 20 for LOGO! Base Modules,
expansion modules, and the
LOGO! TD excluding the TD
front panel
IP 65 for LOGO! TD front panel

Vibrations:

IEC 60068-2-6

5 ... 8.4 Hz
(constant amplitude 3.5 mm)
8.4 ... 150 Hz
(constant acceleration 1 g)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

245

Technical data
A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230...

Criterion

Tested in accordance with

Values

Shock

IEC 60068-2-27

18 shocks
(half-sine wave 15g/11 ms)

Free fall (packaged)

IEC 60068-2-32

0.3 m

EN 55011/A
EN 55022/B

Limit class B group 1

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Noise emission

EN 50081-1
(domestic area)
Electrostatic discharge

IEC 61000-4-2

8 kV air discharge

Severity 3

6 kV contact discharge

Electromagnetic fields

IEC 61000-4-3

Field strength 1 V/m and 10
V/m

HF currents on cables and cable
shielding

IEC 61000-4-6

10 V

Burst pulses

IEC 61000-4-4Severity 3

2 kV (supply and signal lines)

High-energy surge pulse (applies only IEC 61000-4-5Severity 3
to LOGO! 230 ...)

1 kV (power lines) symmetrical
2 kV (power lines) asymmetrical

Safety to IEC
Clearance and creepage distance
rating

IEC 60664, IEC 61131-2,
EN 50178
cULus to UL 508, CSA
C22.2 No. 142
With LOGO! 230 R/RC,
also IEC60730-1

Fulfilled

Insulation strength

IEC 61131-2

Fulfilled

Cycle time
Cycle time per function

< 0.1 ms

Startup
Startup time at power-up

A.2

typ. 9 s

Technical data: LOGO! 230...
LOGO! 230RC
LOGO! 230RCo
Power supply
Input voltage

115...240 V AC/DC

Permissible range

85 ... 265 V AC
100 ... 253 V DC

Permissible mains frequency

47 ... 63 Hz

LOGO!

246

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230...

LOGO! 230RC
LOGO! 230RCo
Power consumption
•

115 V AC

•

15 ... 40 mA

•

240 V AC

•

15 ... 25 mA

•

115 V DC

•

10 ... 25 mA

•

240 V DC

•

6 ... 15 mA

Voltage failure buffering
•

115 V AC/DC

•

typ. 10 ms

•

240 V AC/DC

•

typ. 20 ms

Power loss at
•

115 V AC

•

1.7 ... 4.6 W

•

240 V AC

•

3.6 ... 6.0 W

•

115 V DC

•

1.1... 2.9 W

•

240 V DC

•

1.4 ... 3.6 W

Backup of the real-time clock at 25 °C

typ. 80 hours without battery card
typ. 2 years with battery card

Accuracy of the real-time clock

typ. ± 2 s / day

Digital inputs
Number

8

Electrical isolation

No

Number of high speed inputs

0

Input frequency
•

Normal input

•

max. 4 Hz

•

High speed input

•

--

Max. continuous permissible voltage

265 V AC
253 V DC

Input voltage L1
•

Signal 0

•

< 40 V AC

•

Signal 1

•

> 79 V AC

•

Signal 0

•

< 30 V DC

•

Signal 1

•

> 79 V DC

Input current at
•

Signal 0

•

< 0.03 mA AC

•

Signal 1

•

> 0.08 mA AC

•

Signal 0

•

< 0.03 mA DC

•

Signal 1

•

> 0.12 mA DC

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

247

Technical data
A.2 Technical data: LOGO! 230...

LOGO! 230RC
LOGO! 230RCo
Delay time at 0 to 1:
•

120V AC

•

240 V AC

•

typ. 30 ms

•

120 V DC

•

typ. 25 ms

•

240V DC

•

typ. 15 ms

•

typ. 65 ms

•

typ. 50 ms

Delay time at 1 to 0:
•

120V AC

•

240 V AC

•

typ. 105 ms

•

120 V DC

•

typ. 95 ms

•

240V DC

•

typ. 125 ms

Line length (unshielded)

max. 100 m

Digital outputs
Number

4

Output type

Relay outputs

Electrical isolation

Yes

In groups of

1

Control of a digital input

Yes

Continuous current Ith

max. 10 A per relay

Relay rated voltage

240 VAC/VDC

Surge current

max. 30 A

Incandescent lamp load (25000 switching
cycles) at
•

230/240 V AC

•

1000 W

•

115/120 V AC

•

500 W

Fluorescent tubes with ballast (25000
switching cycles)

10 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000 switching cycles)

1 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000
switching cycles)

10 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

Short circuit-proof cos 1

Power protection B16, 600A

Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7

Power protection B16, 900A

Derating

none; across the entire temperature range

Parallel output circuits for power increase

Not permitted

Protection of output relay (if desired)

max. 16 A, characteristic B16

Switching rate
Mechanical

10 Hz

Ohmic load/lamp load

2 Hz

Inductive load

0.5 Hz

LOGO!

248

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R
Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts
must also be considered. If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded, fluorescent
lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7μF.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

A.3

Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R
LOGO! DM8 230R

LOGO! DM16 230R

Input voltage

115...240 V AC/DC

115 ... 240 V AC/DC

Permissible range

85 ... 265 V AC
100 ... 253 V DC

85 ... 265 V AC
100 ... 253 V DC

Permissible mains frequency

47 ... 63 Hz

Power supply

Power consumption
•

115 V AC

•

10 ... 30 mA

•

10 ... 60 mA

•

240 V AC

•

10 ... 20 mA

•

10 ... 40 mA

•

115 V DC

•

5 ... 15 mA

•

5 ... 25 mA

•

240 V DC

•

5 ... 10 mA

•

5 ... 20 mA

Voltage failure buffering
•

115 V AC/DC

•

typ. 10 ms

•

typ. 10 ms

•

240 V AC/DC

•

typ. 20 ms

•

typ. 20 ms

Power loss at
•

115 V AC

•

1.1 ... 3.5 W

•

1.1 ... 4.5 W

•

240 V AC

•

2.4 ... 4.8 W

•

2.4 ... 5.5 W

•

115 V DC

•

0.5 ... 1.8 W

•

0.6 ... 2.9 W

•

240 V DC

•

1.2 ... 2.4 W

•

1.2 ... 4.8 W

Digital inputs
Number

4

8

Electrical isolation

No

No

Number of high speed inputs

0

0

Input frequency
•

Normal input

•

max. 4 Hz

•

max. 4 Hz

•

High speed input

•

--

•

--

Max. continuous permissible
voltage

265 V AC
253 V DC

265 V AC
253 V DC

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

249

Technical data
A.3 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 230R and LOGO! DM16 230R

LOGO! DM8 230R

LOGO! DM16 230R

Input voltage L1
•

Signal 0

•

< 40 V AC

•

< 40 V AC

•

Signal 1

•

> 79 V AC

•

> 79 V AC

•

Signal 0

•

< 30 V DC

•

< 30 V DC

•

Signal 1

•

> 79 V DC

•

> 79 V DC

Input current at
•

Signal 0

•

< 0.03 mA AC

•

< 0.05 mA AC

•

Signal 1

•

> 0.08 mA AC

•

> 0.08 mA AC

•

Signal 0

•

< 0.03 mA DC

•

< 0.05 mA DC

•

Signal 1

•

> 0.12 mA DC

•

> 0.12 mA DC

Delay time at 0 to 1:
•

120V AC

•

typ. 50 ms

•

typ. 50 ms

•

240 V AC

•

typ. 30 ms

•

typ. 30 ms

•

120 V DC

•

typ. 25 ms

•

typ. 25 ms

•

240V DC

•

typ. 15 ms

•

typ. 15 ms

Delay time at 1 to 0:
•

120V AC

•

typ. 65 ms

•

typ. 65 ms

•

240 V AC

•

typ. 105 ms

•

typ. 105 ms

•

120 V DC

•

typ. 95 ms

•

typ. 95 ms

•

240V DC

•

typ. 125 ms

•

typ. 125 ms

Line length (unshielded)

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

Number

4

8

Output type

Relay outputs

Relay outputs

Electrical isolation

Yes

Yes

In groups of

1

1

Control of a digital input

Yes

Yes

Continuous current Ith

max. 5 A per relay

max. 5 A per relay

Relay rated voltage

240 VAC/VDC

240 VAC/VDC

Surge current

max. 30 A

max. 30 A

1000 W

1000 W

Digital outputs

Incandescent lamp load (25000
switching cycles) at:
230/240 V AC
115/120 V AC

500 W

500 W

Fluorescent tubes with ballast
(25000 switching cycles)

10 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

10 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000
switching cycles)

1 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

1 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 switching cycles)

10 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

10 x 58 W (at 230/240 V AC)

LOGO!

250

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.4 Technical data: LOGO! 24...

LOGO! DM8 230R

LOGO! DM16 230R

Short circuit-proof cos 1

Power protection B16, 600A

Power protection B16, 600A

Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7

Power protection B16, 900A

Power protection B16, 900A

Derating

none; across the entire temperature range

none; across the entire temperature range

Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted
increase

Not permitted

Protection of output relay (if
desired)

max. 16 A,
characteristic B16

max. 16 A,
characteristic B16

10 Hz

10 Hz

Switching rate
Mechanical
Ohmic load/lamp load

2 Hz

2 Hz

Inductive load

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts
must also be considered. If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded, fluorescent
lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7μF.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

A.4

Technical data: LOGO! 24...
LOGO! 24
LOGO! 24o

LOGO! 24C
LOGO! 24Co

Input voltage

24 V DC

24 V DC

Permissible range

20.4 ... 28.8 V DC

20.4 ... 28.8 V DC

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Yes

Permissible mains frequency

--

--

Power consumption from 24 V DC

40 ... 75 mA

40 ... 75 mA

0.3 A per output

0.3 A per output

1.0 ... 1.8 W

1.0 ... 1.8 W

Power supply

Voltage failure buffering
Power loss at 24 V

Backup of the real-time clock at 25 no clock available
°C

typ. 80 hours without battery card
typ. 2 years with battery card

Accuracy of the real-time clock

no clock available

typ. ± 2 s / day

Number

8

8

Electrical isolation

No

No

Numbef of high speed inputs

4 (I3, I4, I5, I6)

4 (I3, I4, I5, I6)

Digital inputs

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

251

Technical data
A.4 Technical data: LOGO! 24...

LOGO! 24
LOGO! 24o

LOGO! 24C
LOGO! 24Co

Input frequency
•

Normal input

•

max. 4 Hz

•

max. 4 Hz

•

High speed input

•

max. 5 kHz

•

max. 5 kHz

Max. continuous permissible voltage

28.8 V DC

28.8 V DC

Input voltage

L+

L+

Signal 0

< 5 V DC

< 5 V DC

Signal 1

> 12 V DC

> 12 V DC

Signal 0

< 0.85 mA (I3...I6)
< 0.05 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)

< 0.85 mA (I3...I6)
< 0.05 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)

Signal 1

> 2 mA (I3... I6)
> 0.15 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)

> 2 mA (I3... I6)
> 0.15 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)

0 to 1

typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 ... I6)

typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 ... I6)

1 to 0

typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 ... I6)

typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 ... I6)

Line length (unshielded)

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

Number

4 (I1=AI3, I2=AI4, I7=AI1,
I8=AI2)

4 (I1=AI3, I2=AI4, I7=AI1, I8=AI2)

Range

0 ... 10 V DC
input impedance 72 kΩ

0 ... 10 V DC
input impedance 72 kΩ

Cycle time for analog value generation

300 ms

300 ms

Line length (shielded and twisted)

max. 10 m

max. 10 m

Error limit

± 1.5% at FS

± 1.5% at FS

Number

4

4

Output type

Transistor,
current-sourcing 1)

Transistor,
current-sourcing 1)

Electrical isolation

No

No

In groups of

--

--

Control of a digital input

Yes

Yes

Output voltage

≤ Supply voltage

≤ Supply voltage

Output current

max. 0.3 A

max. 0.3 A

Short circuit-proof and overloadproof

Yes

Yes

Short circuit current limitation

Approx. 1 A

Approx. 1 A

Derating

none; across the entire
temperature range

none; across the entire temperature range

Short circuit-proof cos 1

--

--

Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7

--

--

Input current at

Delay time at

Analog inputs

Digital outputs

LOGO!

252

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.5 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24 and LOGO! DM16 24

LOGO! 24
LOGO! 24o

LOGO! 24C
LOGO! 24Co

Parallel output circuit for power
increase

Not permitted

Not permitted

Protection of output relay (if desired)

--

--

Mechanical

--

--

Electrical

10 Hz

10 Hz

Ohmic load/lamp load

10 Hz

10 Hz

Inductive load

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

Switching rate 2)

A.5

1)

When LOGO! 24/24o, LOGO! 24C/24Co, LOGO! DM8 24 or LOGO! DM16 24 are switched on,
signal 1 is sent to the digital outputs for about 50 microseconds. Take this into account, especially
when using devices that react to short pulses.

2)

The maximum switching rate is only dependent on the switching program's cycle time.

Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24 and LOGO! DM16 24
LOGO! DM8 24

LOGO! DM16 24

Input voltage

24 V DC

24 V DC

Permissible range

20.4 ... 28.8 V DC

20.4 ... 28.8 V DC

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Yes

Permissible mains frequency

--

--

Power consumption from 24 V
DC

30 ... 45 mA

30 ... 45 mA

0.3 A per output

0.3 A per output

Power loss at 24 V

0.8 ... 1.1 W

0.8 ... 1.7 W

Number

4

8

Electrical isolation

No

No

Number of high speed inputs

0

0

Power supply

Digital inputs

Input frequency
•

Normal input

•

max. 4 Hz

•

max. 4 Hz

•

High speed input

•

--

•

--

Max. continuous permissible
voltage

28.8 V DC

28.8 V DC

Input voltage

L+

L+

•

Signal 0

•

< 5 V DC

•

< 5 V DC

•

Signal 1

•

> 12 V DC

•

> 12 V DC

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

253

Technical data
A.6 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC...

LOGO! DM8 24

LOGO! DM16 24

Input current at
•

Signal 0

•

< 0.85 mA

•

< 0.85 mA

•

Signal 1

•

> 2 mA

•

> 2 mA

Delay time at
•

0 to 1

•

typ. 1.5 ms

•

typ. 1.5 ms

•

1 to 0

•

typ. 1.5 ms

•

typ. 1.5 ms

Line length (unshielded)

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

Number

4

8

Output type

Transistor,
current-sourcing 1)

Transistor,
current-sourcing (1)

Electrical isolation

No

No

In groups of

--

--

Control of a digital input

Yes

Yes

Output voltage

≤ Supply voltage

≤ Supply voltage

Output current

max. 0.3 A

Digital outputs

max. 0.3 A

Short circuit-proof and overload- Yes
proof

Yes

Short circuit current limitation

Approx. 1 A

Approx. 1 A

Derating

none; across the entire temperature range

none; across the entire temperature range

Short circuit-proof cos 1

--

--

Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7

--

--

Parallel output circuit for power
increase

Not permitted

Not permitted

Protection of output relay (if
desired)

--

--

Mechanical

--

--

Electrical

10 Hz

10 Hz

Ohmic load/lamp load

10 Hz

10 Hz

Inductive load

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

Switching rate

1)

When LOGO! 24/24o, LOGO! 24C/24Co, LOGO! DM8 24 or LOGO! DM16 24 are switched on,
signal 1 is sent to the digital outputs for about 50 microseconds. Take this into account, especially
when using devices that react to short pulses.

LOGO!

254

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.6 Technical data: LOGO! 24RC...

A.6

Technical data: LOGO! 24RC...
LOGO! 24RC
LOGO! 24RCo
Power supply
Input voltage

24 V AC/DC

Permissible range

20.4 ... 26.4 V AC
20.4 ... 28.8 V DC

Reverse polarity protection

--

Permissible mains frequency

47 ... 63 Hz

Power consumption
•

24 V AC

•

45 ... 130 mA

•

24 V DC

•

40 ... 100 mA

Voltage failure buffering

typ. 5 ms

Power loss
•

24 V AC

•

1.1... 3.1 W

•

24 V DC

•

1.0 ... 2.4 W

Backup of the real-time clock at 25 °C

typ. 80 hours without battery card
typ. 2 years with battery card

Accuracy of the real-time clock

typ. ± 2 s / day

Digital inputs
Number

8,
optional P action or N action

Electrical isolation

No

Number of high speed inputs

0

Input frequency
•

Normal input

•

max. 4 Hz

•

High speed input

•

--

Max. continuous permissible voltage

26.4 V AC
28.8 V DC

Input voltage

L

•

Signal 0

•

< 5 V AC/DC

•

Signal 1

•

> 12 V AC/DC

Input current at
•

Signal 0

•

< 1.0 mA

•

Signal 1

•

> 2.5 mA

Delay time at
•

0 to 1

•

typ. 1.5 ms

•

1 to 0

•

typ. 15 ms

Line length (unshielded)

max. 100 m

Analog inputs
Number

--

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

255

Technical data
A.7 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24R and LOGO! DM16 24R

LOGO! 24RC
LOGO! 24RCo
Range

--

max. Input voltage

--

Digital outputs
Number

4

Output type

Relay outputs

Electrical isolation

Yes

In groups of

1

Control of a digital input

Yes

Continuous current Ith

max. 10 A per relay

Relay rated voltage

240 VAC/VDC

Surge current

max. 30 A

Incandescent lamp load (25000 switching
cycles) at

1000 W

Fluorescent tubes with ballast (25000
switching cycles)

10 x 58 W

Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000 switching cycles)

1 x 58 W

Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000
switching cycles)

10 x 58 W

Derating

none; across the entire temperature range

Short circuit-proof cos 1

Power protection B16, 600A

Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7

Power protection B16, 900A

Parallel output circuits for power increase

Not permitted

Protection of output relay
(if desired)

max. 16 A,
characteristic B16

Switching rate
Mechanical

10 Hz

Ohmic load/lamp load

2 Hz

Inductive load

0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts
must also be considered. If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded, fluorescent
lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7μF.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

LOGO!

256

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.7 Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24R and LOGO! DM16 24R

A.7

Technical data: LOGO! DM8 24R and LOGO! DM16 24R
LOGO! DM8 24R

LOGO! DM16 24R

Input voltage

24 V AC/DC

24 V DC

Permissible range

20.4 ... 26.4 V AC
20.4 ... 28.8 V DC

20.4 ... 28.8 V DC

Reverse polarity protection

--

--

Permissible mains frequency

47 ... 63 Hz

Power supply

Power consumption
•

24 V AC

•

40 ... 110 mA

•

24 V DC

•

20 ... 75 mA

Voltage failure buffering

typ. 5 ms

•

30 ... 90 mA

typ. 5 ms

Power loss
•

24 V AC

•

0.9 ... 2.7 W

•

24 V DC

•

0.4 ... 1.8 W

•

0.7 ... 2.5 W

Digital inputs
Number

4, optional P action or N action

8

Electrical isolation

No

No

Number of high speed inputs

0

0

Input frequency
•

Normal input

•

max. 4 Hz

•

max. 4 Hz

•

High speed input

•

--

•

--

Max. continuous permissible
voltage

26.4 V AC
28.8 V DC

Input voltage

L

28.8 V DC

•

Signal 0

•

< 5 V AC/DC

•

< 5 V DC

•

Signal 1

•

> 12 V AC/DC

•

> 12 V DC

Input current at
•

Signal 0

•

< 1.0 mA

•

< 1.0 mA

•

Signal 1

•

> 2.5 mA

•

> 2.0 mA

Delay time at
•

0 to 1

•

typ. 1.5 ms

•

typ. 1.5 ms

•

1 to 0

•

typ. 15 ms

•

typ. 1.5 ms

Line length (unshielded)

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

Digital outputs
Number

4

8

Output type

Relay outputs

Relay outputs

Electrical isolation

Yes

Yes

In groups of

1

1

Control of a digital input

Yes

Yes

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

257

Technical data
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R

LOGO! DM8 24R

LOGO! DM16 24R

Continuous current Ith

max. 5 A per relay

max. 5 A per relay

Relay rated voltage

240 VAC/VDC

240 VAC/VDC

Surge current

max. 30 A

max. 30 A

Incandescent lamp load (25000
switching cycles) at

1000 W

1000 W

Fluorescent tubes with ballast
(25000 switching cycles)

10 x 58 W

10 x 58 W

Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000
switching cycles)

1 x 58 W

1 x 58 W

Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 switching cycles)

10 x 58 W

10 x 58 W

Derating

none; across the entire temperature range

none; across the entire temperature range

Short circuit-proof cos 1

Power protection B16, 600A

Power protection B16, 600A

Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7

Power protection B16, 900A

Power protection B16, 900A

Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted
increase

Not permitted

Protection of output relay (if
desired)

max. 16 A,
characteristic B16

max. 16 A,
characteristic B16

10 Hz

10 Hz

Switching rate
Mechanical
Ohmic load/lamp load

2 Hz

2 Hz

Inductive load

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts
must also be considered. If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded, fluorescent
lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7μF.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

A.8

Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R
LOGO! 12/24RC
LOGO! 12/24RCo

LOGO! DM8 12/24R

Input voltage

12/24 V DC

12/24 V DC

Permissible range

10.8 ... 28.8 V DC

10.8 ... 28.8 V DC

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Yes

Power supply

LOGO!

258

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R

LOGO! 12/24RC
LOGO! 12/24RCo

LOGO! DM8 12/24R

Power consumption
•

12 V DC

•

60 ... 175 mA

•

30 ... 140 mA

•

24 V DC

•

40 ... 100mA

•

20 ... 75 mA

Voltage failure buffering
•

12 V DC

•

typ. 2 ms

•

typ. 2 ms

•

24 V DC

•

typ. 5 ms

•

typ. 5 ms

Power loss
•

12 V DC

•

0.7 ... 2.1 W

•

0.3 ... 1.7 W

•

24 V DC

•

1.0 ... 2.4 W

•

0.4 ... 1.8 W

Backup of the real-time clock at
25 °C

typ. 80 hours without battery
card
typ. 2 years with battery card

--

Accuracy of the real-time clock

typ. ± 2 s / day

--

Electrical isolation

No

No

Digital inputs
Number

8

4

Electrical isolation

No

No

Number of high speed inputs

4 (I3, I4, I5, I6)

0

Input frequency
•

Normal input

•

Max. 4 Hz

•

max. 4 Hz

•

High speed input

•

Max. 5 kHz

•

--

Max. continuous permissible
voltage

28.8 V DC

28.8 V DC

Input voltage L+
•

Signal 0

•

< 5 V DC

•

< 5 V DC

•

Signal 1

•

> 8.5 V DC

•

> 8.5 V DC

Input current at
•

Signal 0

< 0.85 mA (I3...I6)
< 0.05 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)

< 0.85 mA

•

Signal 1

> 1.5 mA (I3... I6)
> 0.1 mA (I1, I2, I7, I8)

> 1.5 mA

Delay time at
•

0 to 1

typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 ... I6)

typ. 1.5 ms

•

1 to 0

typ. 1.5 ms
<1.0 ms (I3 ... I6)

typ. 1.5 ms

max. 100 m

max. 100 m

Number

4 (I1=AI3, I2=AI4, I7=AI1,
I8=AI2)

--

Range

0 ... 10 V DC
input impedance 72 kΩ

--

Line length (unshielded)
Analog inputs

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

259

Technical data
A.8 Technical data: LOGO! 12/24... LOGO! DM8 12/24R

LOGO! 12/24RC
LOGO! 12/24RCo

LOGO! DM8 12/24R

Cycle time for analog value
generation

300 ms

--

Line length (shielded and twisted)

max. 10 m

--

Error limit

± 1.5 % at FS

--

Number

4

4

Output type

Relay outputs

Relay outputs

Electrical isolation

Yes

Yes

In groups of

1

1

Control of a digital input

Yes

Yes

Continuous current Ith (per terminal)

max. 10 A per relay

max. 5 A per relay

Relay rated voltage

240 VAC/VDC

240 VAC/VDC

Surge current

max. 30 A

max. 30 A

Incandescent lamp load (25000
switching cycles) at

1000 W

1000 W

Fluorescent tubes with ballast
(25000 switching cycles)

10 x 58 W

10 x 58 W

Fluorescent tubes, conventionally compensated (25000
switching cycles)

1 x 58 W

1 x 58 W

Fluorescent tubes, uncompensated (25000 switching cycles)

10 x 58 W

10 x 58 W

Derating

none; across the entire temperature range

none; across the entire temperature range

Short circuit-proof cos 1

Power protection B16, 600A

Power protection B16, 600A

Short circuit-proof cos 0.5 to 0.7

Power protection B16, 900A

Power protection B16, 900A

Digital outputs

Parallel output circuits for power Not permitted
increase

Not permitted

Protection of output relay
(if desired)

max. 16 A, characteristic B16

max. 16 A, characteristic B16

10 Hz

10 Hz

Switching rate
Mechanical
Ohmic load/lamp load

2 Hz

2 Hz

Inductive load

0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz

Notice: For fluorescent lamps with capacitors, the technical data of fluorescent lamp ballasts
must also be considered. If the maximum allowed surge current is exceeded, fluorescent
lamps must be switched with appropriate contactor relays.
The data was determined with the following devices:
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 uncompensated.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 583 3-1 parallel compensated with 7μF.
Siemens fluorescent tubes 58W VVG 5LZ 501 1-1N with ballast.

LOGO!

260

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.9 Switching capacity/service life of the relay outputs

A.9

Switching capacity/service life of the relay outputs

Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with ohmic loading (heating):

Switching capacity and service life of the contacts with high inductive load to IEC 947-5-1 DC 13/AC
15 (contactors, solenoid coils, motors):

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

261

Technical data
A.10 Technical data: LOGO! AM2

A.10

Technical data: LOGO! AM2
LOGO! AM2
Power supply
Input voltage

12/24 V DC

Permissible range

10.8 ... 28.8 V DC

Power consumption

25 ... 50 mA

Voltage failure buffering

typ. 5 ms

Power loss at
•

12 V

•

0.3 ... 0.6 W

•

24 V

•

0.6 ... 1.2 W

Electrical isolation

No

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Ground terminal

for connecting ground and shielding of the analog
measuring line

Analog inputs
Number

2

Type

Unipolar

Input range

0 ... 10 V DC (input impedance 76 kΩ) or
0/4 ... 20 mA (input impedance <250 Ω)

Resolution

10 bit, normalized to 0 ... 1000

Cycle time for analog value generation

50 ms

Electrical isolation

No

Line length (shielded and twisted)

max. 10 m

Encoder supply voltage

none

Error limit

± 1.5 %

Interference frequency suppression

55 Hz

LOGO!

262

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.11 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 PT100

A.11

Technical data: LOGO! AM2 PT100
LOGO! AM2 PT100
Power supply
Input voltage

12/24 V DC

Permissible range

10.8 ... 28.8 V DC

Power consumption

25 ... 50 mA

Voltage failure buffering

typ. 5 ms

Power loss at
•

12 V

•

0.3 ... 0.6 W

•

24 V

•

0.6 ... 1.2 W

Electrical isolation

No

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Ground terminal

for connecting ground and shielding of the measuring
line

Sensor inputs
Number

2

Type

RTD PT100

Connection of sensors
•

2-wire technique

•

Yes

•

3-wire technique

•

Yes

Measurement range

-50 °C... +200 °C
-58 °F ... +392 °F

Settings for the measurement display on
the LOGO! Basic:
•

1 °C steps

•

Offset: -50, Gain: 0.25

•

0.25 °C steps
(rounded to one decimal)

•

Offset: -500, Gain: 2.50

•

1 °F steps

•

Offset: -58, Gain: 0.45

•

0.25 °F steps
(rounded to one decimal)

•

Offset: -580, Gain: 4.50

Curve linearization

No

Measuring current Ic

1.1 mA

Measurement rate

depends on the installation

Resolution

0.25 °C

Error limits

of the final measured value:

typical: 50 ms

•

0 °C ... +200 °C

•

±1.0 %

•

-50 °C ... +200 °C

•

± 1.5 %

Electrical isolation

No

Cable length (shielded)

max. 10 m

Interference frequency
suppression

55 Hz

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

263

Technical data
A.12 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 RTD

A.12

Technical data: LOGO! AM2 RTD
LOGO! AM2 RTD
Power supply
Input voltage

12/24 V DC

Permissible range

10.8 ... 28.8 V DC

Power consumption

30 ... 40 mA

Voltage failure buffering

typ. 5 ms

Power loss at
•

12 V

•

0.36 ... 0.48 W

•

24 V

•

0.72 ... 0.96 W

Electrical isolation

No

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Ground terminal

for connecting ground and shielding of the measuring
line

Sensor inputs
Number

2

Type

PT100 or PT1000 with the default temperature coefficient of α = 0.003850 for both types, or compatible
sensors

Connection of sensors
•

2-wire technique

•

Yes

•

3-wire technique

•

Yes

Measurement range

-50 °C... +200 °C
-58 °F ... +392 °F

Settings for the measurement display on
the LOGO! Basic:
•

1 °C steps

•

Offset: -50, Gain: 0.25

•

0.25 °C steps
(rounded to one decimal)

•

Offset: -500, Gain: 2.50

•

1 °F steps

•

Offset: -58, Gain: 0.45

•

0.25 °F steps
(rounded to one decimal)

•

Offset: -580, Gain: 4.50

Curve linearization

No

Measuring current Ic

Pulse current signal:
PT100: 1.141 mA (cycle time = 2.3 ms)
PT1000: 0.5 mA (cycle time = 2.3 ms)

Measurement rate

depends on the installation
typical: 50 ms

Resolution

0.25 °C

Error limits

of the final measured value:

•

0 °C ... +200 °C

•

± 2 °C

•

-50 °C ... 0 °C

•

± 3 °C

LOGO!

264

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.13 Technical data: LOGO! AM2 AQ

LOGO! AM2 RTD

A.13

Electrical isolation

No

Cable length (shielded)

max. 10 m

Interference frequency
suppression

55 Hz

Technical data: LOGO! AM2 AQ
LOGO! AM2 AQ
Power supply
Input voltage

24 V DC

Permissible range

20.4 ... 28.8 V DC

Power consumption

35 ...90 mA

Voltage failure buffering

typ. 5 ms

Power loss at 24 V

0.9 ... 2.2 W

Electrical isolation

No

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Ground terminal

for connecting ground and shielding of the analog output line.

Analog outputs
Number

2

Voltage range

0 ... 10 V DC

Voltage load

≥5 kΩ

Current output

0/4...20mA

Curreny load

≤250 Ω

Resolution

10 bit, normalized to 0 ... 1000

Cycle time for analog output

depending on installation (50 ms)

Electrical isolation

No

Line length (shielded and twisted)

max. 10 m

Error limit

Voltage output: ± 2.5 % FS
Voltage output: ± 3 % FS

Short circuit protection

Voltage output: Yes (affect neighboring voltage output)

Overload protection

Voltage output: Yes (affect neighboring voltage output)

Note
The 0/4 ... 20 mA current output is only possible when the module is used with a LOGO!
0BA6 Base Module.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

265

Technical data
A.14 Technical data: CM EIB/KNX

A.14

Technical data: CM EIB/KNX
CM EIB/KNX
Mechanical data
Dimensions (WxHxD)

36 x 90 x 55 mm

Weight

Approx. 107 g

Installation

on a 35 mm profile rail 2 module widths or wall mounting, must be mounted as the last module on the right of
LOGO!

Power supply
Input voltage

24 V AC/DC

Permissible range

-15% ... +10% AC
-15% ... +20% DC

Power consumption from power supply

max. 25 mA

Power consumption via bus

5 mA

EIB data transmission rate

9600 baud

Connections
Digital inputs (I)

virtual max. 16

Digital outputs (Q)

virtual max. 12

Analog inputs (AI)

virtual max. 8

Analog outputs (AQ)

virtual max. 2

Group addresses

max. 56

Associations

max. 56

Climatic conditions
Climatic withstand capability

EN 50090-2-2

Ambient operating conditions

0 ... 55 °C natural convection

Storage and transport temperature

- 40 °C ... +70 °C

Relative humidity

95 % at +25 °C (not condensing)

Electrical safety
Degree of protection

IP 20 (in accordance with EN 60529)

Interference suppression

EN 55011 (limit class B)

Certification

IEC 60730-1
IEC 61131-2

Overvoltage protection

Slow-blowing fuse 80 mA (recommended)

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
EMC requirements

Complies with EN 61000-6-1 and EN 61000-6-2

Approval
KNX/EIB certified
UL 508
FM
CE mark
In accordance with the EMC guideline (residential and
functional buildings), low voltage guideline

LOGO!

266

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.15 Technical data: CM AS Interface

A.15

Technical data: CM AS Interface
CM AS Interface
Mechanical data
Dimensions (WxHxD)

36 x 90 x 58 mm

Weight

Approx. 90 g

Installation

on a 35 mm profile rail 2 module widths or wall mounting, must be mounted as the last module on the right of
LOGO!

Power supply
Input voltage

30 V DC

Permissible range

26.5 ... 31.5 V DC

Reverse polarity protection

Yes

Total current drain

Itot max. 70 mA

Connections
Digital inputs (I)

the next four inputs after the physical inputs of LOGO!
(In ... In+3)

Digital outputs (Q)

the next four outputs after the physical outputs of
LOGO!
(Qn ... Qn+3)

I/O configuration (hex)

7

ID code (hex)

F

ID1 code (hex)

F (default, variable from 0 ... F)

ID2 code (hex)

F

Bus connection

AS interface in accordance with specification

Analog inputs (AI)

none

Analog outputs (AQ)

none

Climatic conditions
Ambient operating conditions

0 °C ... +55 °C

Storage temperature

- 40 °C ... +70 °C

Electrical safety
Electrical data

to AS interface specification

Degree of protection

IP 20

Interference suppression

Limit class A

Approval
IEC 61131-2
EN 50178
cULus to UL 508
CSA C22.2 No. 142

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

267

Technical data
A.16 Technical data: LOGO!Power 12 V

A.16

Technical data: LOGO!Power 12 V
LOGO! Power 12 V is a primary-switched power supply unit for LOGO! devices. Two current
ranges are available.
LOGO! Power
12 V / 1.9 A

LOGO! Power
12 V / 4.5 A

Input data
Input voltage

100 ... 240 V AC

Permissible range

85 ... 264 V AC

Permissible mains frequency

47 ... 63 Hz

Voltage failure buffering

> 40 ms (at 187 V AC)

Input current

0.53 ... 0.3 A

1.13 ... 0.61 A

Make current (25°C)

≤15 A

≤ 30 A

Device protection

Internal

Recommended circuit breaker
(IEC 898) in mains line

≥ 16 A characteristic B
≥ 10 A characteristic C

Output data
Output voltage
Overall tolerance
Adjustment range
Residual ripple

12 V DC
±3 %
10.5 ... 16.1 V DC
< 200/300 mVpp

Output current
Overcurrent limiting

1.9 A
typ. 2.5 A

4.5 A
typ. 5.9 A

Efficiency

typ. 80 %

typ. 85 %

Parallel circuit for power increase

Yes

Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference suppression

EN 50081-1, Class B to EN 55022

Interference immunity

EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11

Safety
Electrical isolation, primary/secondary

Yes, SELV (to EN 60950 and EN 50178)

Safety class

II

Degree of protection

IP 20 (to EN 60529)

CE marking
UL/cUL certification
FM approval
GL approval

Yes
Yes; UL 508 / UL 60950
Yes; Class I, Div. 2, T4
Yes

LOGO!

268

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.17 Technical data: LOGO!Power 24 V

LOGO! Power
12 V / 1.9 A

LOGO! Power
12 V / 4.5 A

General details

A.17

Ambient temperature range

-20 ... +55°C, natural convection

Storage and shipping temperature

-40 ... +70°C

Connections at input

One terminal (1 x 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per L1 and N

Connections at output

Two terminals (1x.2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per + and -

Installation

On 35 mm DIN rail, snap-on

Dimensions in mm (WxHxD)

54 x 80 x 55

72 x 90 x 55

Approx. weight

0.2 kg

0.3 kg

Technical data: LOGO!Power 24 V
LOGO! Power 24 V is a primary-switched power supply module for LOGO! devices. Two
current ranges are available.
LOGO! Power
24 V / 1.3 A

LOGO! Power
24 V / 2.5 A

Input data
Input voltage

100 ... 240 V AC

Permissible range

85 ... 264 V AC

Permissible mains frequency

47 ... 63 Hz

Voltage failure buffering

40 ms (at 187 V AC)

Input current

0.70 ... 0.35 A

1.22 ... 0.66 A

Inrush current (25°C)

< 15 A

< 30 A

Device protection

Internal

Recommended circuit breaker
(IEC 898) in mains line

≥ 16 A characteristic B
≥ 10 A characteristic C

Output data
Output voltage
Overall tolerance
Adjustment range
Residual ripple

24 V DC
±3%
22.2 ... 26.4 V DC
< 200/300 mVpp

Output current

1.3 A

2.5 A

Overcurrent limiting

typ. 2.0 A

typ. 3.4 A

Efficiency

> 82 %

> 87 %

Parallel circuit for power increase

Yes

Electromagnetic compatibility
Interference suppression

EN 50081-1, Class B to EN 55022

Interference immunity

EN 61000-6-2,
EN 61000-4-2/-3/-4/-5/-6/-11

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

269

Technical data
A.17 Technical data: LOGO!Power 24 V

LOGO! Power
24 V / 1.3 A

LOGO! Power
24 V / 2.5 A

Safety
Electrical isolation, primary/secondary

Yes, SELV (to EN 60950 and EN 50178)

Safety class

II

Degree of protection

IP 20 (to EN 60529)

CE marking
UL/cUL certification
FM approval
GL approval

Yes
Yes; UL 508 / UL 60950
Yes; Class I, Div. 2, T4
Yes

General details
Ambient temperature range

-20 ... +55 °C, natural convection

Storage and shipping temperature

-40 ... +70 °C

Connections at input

One terminal (1 x. 2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per L1 and N

Connections at output

Two terminals (1x.2.5 mm2 or 2 x 1.5 mm2) per + and -

Installation

On 35 mm DIN rail, snap-on

Dimensions in mm (WxHxD)

54 x 80 x 55

72 x 90 x 55

Approx. weight

0.2 kg

0.3 kg

LOGO!

270

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.18 Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230

A.18

Technical data: LOGO! Contact 24/230
LOGO! Contact 24 and LOGO! Contact 230 are switching modules for direct switching of
ohmic loads up to 20 Amps and motors up to 4 kW (without noise emission, hum-free). Both
modules have a built-in protective circuit for damping surges.

Operating voltage

LOGO!
Contact 24

LOGO!
Contact 230

24 V DC

230 V AC;
50/60 Hz

Switching capacity
Utilization category AC-1: Switching of ohmic loads at 55°C
Operating current at 400 V

20 A

Output with three-phase loads at 400 V

13 kW

Utilization category AC-2, AC-3: Motor with slip ring induction/cage
armature
Operating current at 400 V

8.4 A

Output with three-phase loads at 400 V

4 kW

Short-circuit protection:
Assignment type 1

25 A

Assignment type 2

10 A

Connecting leads

Fine-wire with wire end ferrules
Solid wire
2 x (0.75 to 2.5) mm2
2 x (1 to 2.5) mm2
1 x 4 mm2

Dimensions (WxHxD)

36 x 72 x 55

Ambient temperature

-25 ... +55 °C

Storage temperature

-50 ... +80 °C

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

271

Technical data
A.19 Technical data: LOGO! TD (Text Display)

A.19

Technical data: LOGO! TD (Text Display)
LOGO! TD
Mechanical data
Dimensions (WxHxD)

128.2 x 86 x 38.7 mm

Weight

Approx. 220 g

Installation

Bracket mounting

Keyboard

Membrane keypad with 10 keys

Display

FSTN-Graphic Display with 128 x 64 (columns x rows),
LED backlight

Power supply
Input voltage

24 V AC/DC
12 V DC

Permissible range

20.4 ... 26.4 V AC
10.2 ... 28.8 V DC

Permissible mains frequency

47 ... 63 Hz

Power consumption
12 V DC

•

typ. 65 mA

•

24 V DC

•

typ. 40 mA

•

24 V AC

•

typ. 90 mA

•

Data transmission rate

19,200 baud

Degree of protection
IP20 for LOGO! TD excluding front panel
IP65 for LOGO! TD front panel
Connection distance
≤ 2.5 m (LOGO! TD cable only), max. 10 m (LOGO! TD
cable + standard Sub-D cable)
LCD Display and Backlight
Backlight lifetime 1)

20,000 hours

Display lifetime 2)

50,000 hours

Mounting hole dimensions
Width x Height

(119.5+0.5mm) x (78.5+0.5mm)

1)

Backlight lifetime is defined as: The final brightness is 50% of the original brightness.

2)

Display lifetime is calculated under ordinary operating and storage conditions: room temperature
(20 ±8° C), normal humidity below 65% relative humidity, and not in exposure to direct sunlight.

LOGO!

272

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Technical data
A.20 Technical data: Battery information for LOGO! cards

A.20

Technical data: Battery information for LOGO! cards
Battery information for LOGO! Battery cards
Manufacturer

Panasonic

Type

BR1220/1VCE

Voltage

3V

Capacity

35mAh

Mechanical data
Dimensions

12.5mm x 1.6mm

Weight

0.9g

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

273

Technical data
A.20 Technical data: Battery information for LOGO! cards

LOGO!

274

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Determining the cycle time

B

The program cycle is the complete execution of the circuit program, that is, primarily the
reading in of the inputs, the processing of the circuit program and the subsequent reading
out of the outputs. The cycle time is the time required to execute a circuit program once in
full.
The time required for a program cycle can be determined using a short test program. This
test program is created in LOGO! and returns a value during its execution in parameter
assignment mode from which the current cycle time is derived.

Test program
1. Create the test program by linking an output to a threshold trigger and connecting the
trigger input with an inverted flag.

2. Configure the threshold trigger as shown below. A pulse is generated in each program
cycle due to the inverted flag. The trigger interval is set to 2 seconds.

3. Now start the circuit program and switch LOGO! to parameter assignment mode. In this
mode, view the trigger parameters.

4. The reciprocal value of fa is equivalent to the LOGO! execution time of the current circuit
program in its memory.
1/fa = cycle time in s

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

275

Determining the cycle time

Explanation
The inverted flag block changes its output signal at each program execution. Thus, one logic
level (high or low) width is exactly equivalent to the length of one cycle. Hence, a period lasts
2 cycles.
The threshold trigger indicates the ratio of periods per 2 seconds, which results in the ratio of
cycles per second.

LOGO!

276

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure")

C

Because some specific applications do not require operator control and monitoring units
such as buttons or a display, we provide the LOGO! 12/24RCo, LOGO! 24o, LOGO! 24Co,
LOGO! 24RCo and LOGO! 230RCo versions without display.
View of a LOGO! 230RCo, for example:

Less is definitely more!
The versions without display offer you the following benefits:
● Even more cost-effective without the operating element
● Requires less switch cabinet space than conventional hardware
● Substantial benefits with regard to flexibility and prime costs compared to stand–alone
electronic switchgear
● Of advantage even for applications in which merely two or three conventional switching
devices can be replaced
● Very easy to use
● Access protected
● Compatible to LOGO! versions with display
● Offers the option to read data by means of LOGO!Soft Comfort

Creating a circuit program without operator panel
There are two ways to create a circuit program for a LOGO! without display:
● You create the circuit program with LOGO!Soft Comfort on your PC and then download it
to LOGO!.
● You download the circuit program from a LOGO! memory card or combined
memory/battery card (Page 227) to your LOGO! without display.

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

277

LOGO! without display ("LOGO! Pure")

Operating characteristics
LOGO! is ready for operation when power is switched on. Switching off a LOGO! without
display is equivalent to disconnecting the power supply, e.g. as if you were removing the
plug.
The circuit program of LOGO!...o versions cannot be started or stopped by means of
buttons. This is why the LOGO!...o versions have other startup characteristics:

Startup characteristics
If there is no circuit program in LOGO! or on the inserted memory card or combined
memory/battery card, LOGO! remains in STOP.
If there is a valid circuit program in LOGO! memory, the LOGO! automatically switches from
STOP to RUN when power is switched on.
The circuit program on an inserted memory card or combined memory/battery card is
automatically copied to LOGO!, immediately after power is switched on. The existing circuit
program in LOGO! memory is overwritten. The system automatically changes from STOP to
RUN.
Provided the PC cable is connected to LOGO! (Page 239), you can download the circuit
program to LOGO! and start it by means of LOGO!Soft Comfort PC software.

Operating status indication
Operating states, e.g. Power On, RUN and STOP are indicated by an LED on the front hood.
● Red LED: Power On/STOP
● Green LED: Power On/RUN
The red LED is lit after Power On and in all LOGO! states other than RUN. The green LED is
lit when LOGO! is in RUN mode.

Reading current data
LOGO!Soft Comfort provides an online test for reading the current data of all functions while
the system is in RUN.
If your LOGO! without display holds a protected memory card or combined memory/battery
card, you cannot read the current data unless you enter the correct password (Page 229) for
the circuit program. The circuit program is otherwise deleted from LOGO! memory when you
remove the memory card or combined memory/battery card to connect the PC cable.

Deleting the circuit program
Use LOGO!Soft Comfort to delete the circuit program and password if a password exists.

LOGO!

278

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! menu structure
D.1

D

LOGO! Basic

Menu overview

Main menu (ESC / > Stop)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

279

LOGO! menu structure
D.1 LOGO! Basic

Programming menu (ESC / > Stop → > Program)

Transfer menu (ESC / > Stop → > Card)

LOGO!

280

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! menu structure
D.1 LOGO! Basic

Setup menu (ESC / > Stop → > Setup)

Start Menu (RUN)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

281

LOGO! menu structure
D.1 LOGO! Basic

See also
Parameters (Page 217)
Assigning a circuit program name (Page 75)
Selecting analog output values for RUN/STOP transition (Page 90)
Defining the type of analog outputs (Page 91)
Memory space and circuit program size (Page 98)
Deleting the circuit program and password (Page 92)
Password (Page 76)
Message texts (Page 178)
Copying data from LOGO! to the memory card (Page 233)
Copying data from the memory card to LOGO! (Page 234)
Security function (CopyProtect) (Page 229)
Summertime/wintertime conversion (Page 93)
Synchronization (Page 96)
Setting the time of day and date (LOGO! ... C) (Page 222)
Setting the display contrast and backlight choice (Page 223)
Setting the number of AIs in the LOGO! Basic (Page 225)
Setting the menu language (Page 224)

LOGO!

282

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

LOGO! menu structure
D.2 LOGO! TD

D.2

LOGO! TD

Menu overview

Main menu (ESC / > Stop)

Setup menu (ESC / > Stop → >Setup)

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

283

LOGO! menu structure
D.2 LOGO! TD

Start menu (LOGO! Basic in RUN)

See also
Parameters (Page 217)
Message texts (Page 178)
Setting the time of day and date (LOGO! ... C) (Page 222)
Summertime/wintertime conversion (Page 93)
Synchronization (Page 96)
Setting the display contrast and backlight choice (Page 223)
Setting the menu language (Page 224)

LOGO!

284

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

E

Order numbers

Modules
Variant
Basic

Basic without display (pure)

Digital modules

Analog modules

Communication modules
Text Display module
*:

Designation

Order number

LOGO! 12/24 RC *

6ED1052-1MD00-0BA6

LOGO! 24 *

6ED1052-1CC00-0BA6

LOGO! 24C *

6ED1052-1CC01-0BA6

LOGO! 24RC (AC/DC)

6ED1052-1HB00-0BA6

LOGO! 230RC (AC/DC)

6ED1052-1FB00-0BA6

LOGO! 12/24RCo *

6ED1052-2MD00-0BA6

LOGO! 24o *

6ED1052-2CC00-0BA6

LOGO! 24Co *

6ED1052-2CC01-0BA6

LOGO! 24RCo (AC/DC)

6ED1052-2HB00-0BA6

LOGO! 230RCo (AC/DC)

6ED1052-2FB00-0BA6

LOGO! DM8 12/24R

6ED1055-1MB00-0BA1

LOGO! DM8 24

6ED1055-1CB00-0BA0

LOGO! DM8 24R

6ED1055-1HB00-0BA0

LOGO! DM8 230R

6ED1055-1FB00-0BA1

LOGO! DM16 24

6ED1055-1CB10-0BA0

LOGO! DM16 24R

6ED1055-1NB10-0BA0

LOGO! DM16 230R

6ED1055-1FB10-0BA0

LOGO! AM2

6ED1055-1MA00-0BA0

LOGO! AM2 PT100

6ED1055-1MD00-0BA0

LOGO! AM2 RTD

6ED1055-1MD00-0BA1

LOGO! AM2 AQ (0...10V,
0/4...20mA)

6ED1055-1MM00-0BA1

CM EIB/KNX

6BK1700-0BA00-0AA1

CM AS Interface

3RK1400-0CE10-0AA2

LOGO! TD

6ED1055-4MH00-0BA0

Also with analog inputs

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

285

22BOrder numbers

Accessories
Accessories

Designation

Order number

Software

LOGO!Soft Comfort V6.1

6ED1058-0BA02-0YA0

Upgrade to LOGO!Soft Comfort V6.1

6ED1058-0CA02-0YE0

Memory card

LOGO! Memory Card

6ED1056-1DA00-0BA0

Battery card

LOGO! Battery card

6ED1 056-6XA00-0BA0

Combined memory/battery
card

LOGO! Combined Memory/Battery Card

6ED1 056-7DA00-0BA0

Switching modules

LOGO!Contact 24 V

6ED1057-4CA00-0AA0

LOGO!Contact 230 V

6ED1057-4EA00-0AA0

Power modules

Others

LOGO!Power 12V/1.9A

6EP1321-1SH02

LOGO!Power 12V/4.5A

6EP1322-1SH02

LOGO!Power 24V/1.3A

6EP1331-1SH02

LOGO!Power 24V/2.5A

6EP1332-1SH42

LOGO!Power 24V/4A

6EP1332-1SH51

LOGO!Power 5V/3A

6EP1311-1SH02

LOGO!Power 5V/6.3A

6EP1311-1SH12

LOGO!Power 15V/1.9A

6EP1351-1SH02

LOGO!Power 15V/4A

6EP1352-1SH02

PC cable

6ED1057-1AA00-0BA0

USB PC cable

6ED1057-1AA01-0BA0

Modem cable

6ED1057-1CA00-0BA0

Manual

6ED1050-1AA00-0BE7

LOGO!

286

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

F

Abbreviations

AM

Analog module

B1

Block number B1

BN

Block Number

C

LOGO! Device designation: integrated clock

CM

Communication Module

Cnt

Count = Counter input

Co

Connector

Dir

Direction (of count, for example)

DM

Digital Module

EIB

European Installation Bus

EIS

EIB Interoperability Standard

En

Enable = switching on (e.g., clock generators)

ETS

EIB Tool Software

Fre

Input for frequency signals to be analyzed

GF

Basic Functions

Inv

Input for inverting the output signal

KNX

Konnex Association Standard for home and building electronic systems

No

Cam (parameter of the timer)

o

In LOGO! designations: without display

Par

Parameter

R

Reset input

R

In LOGO! designations: Relay outputs

Ral

Reset all = Input for resetting all internal values

S

Set (latching relay, for example)

SF

Special functions

SU

Subunit

T

Time = parameter

TD

Text Display

Trg

Trigger (parameter)

0BA6 device

The latest LOGO! Basic version, described in this manual

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

287

Abbreviations

LOGO!

288

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Index
A
Amplifier
analog, 173
Analog
comparator, 165
values, 117
Analog amplifier, 173
Analog differential trigger, 163
Analog math, 209
Analog math error detection, 212
Analog module, 12
Analog multiplexer, 194
Analog ramp, 197
Analog threshold trigger, 160
Analog value monitoring, 170
Analog watchdog, 170
AND, 108
AS interface, 13
AS interface bus
communication failure, 56
communication states, 56
Asynchronous pulse generator, 134

B
Backlight flags, 105
Backlight lifetime
LOGO! TD, 272
Basic functions, 103, 107
AND, 108
AND, with edge, 109
NAND, 109
NAND, with edge, 110
NOT, 113
OR, 111
XOR, 113
Basics on special functions, 114
blank outputs, 104
BN, 103

C
Cap, 32
Card See Program module (card), 227
CE label, 23

Ch by Ch ticking, 183
Character set flag, 105
Character sets, 178
Chinese character set, 179
circuit program, 98
Circuit programs
archiving, 227, 227
reproduce, 227
send by mail, 227
CM See Communications module, 13
Co, 103, 103
Combined memory/battery card, 227
Communication module
AS interface, 13
EIB/KNX, 13
Communication modules, 13
Compatiblity
Expansion modules, 31
Connector, 32
Connectors, 103, 103
hi, 59
inputs, 59
lo, 59
open, 106
outputs, 59
unused, 59, 65
x, 59, 59, 65, 114
Constants, 103
Conversion
Summertime and wintertime, 93
Counters
Operating hours, 154
Threshold trigger, 158
Up/down, 151
cULus, 23
Cursor keys, 105, 106, 188

D
Days of the week, 143
Demo versions, 238
Detection of math error
Analog amplifier, 212
Digital module, 12, 12
DIN rail, 31
Display lifetime
LOGO! TD, 272
Display modules, 12

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

289

Index

Divide by 0 error, 212
DM8... See Digital module, 12, 12

E
Edge evaluation, 109, 110
EIB bus
communication failure, 56
communication states, 56
EIB/KNX, 13
Errors, analog math, 212
exclusive OR, 113
Expansion modules, 12, 58
Analog, 12
digital, 12, 12
operating state, 55

F
Flag blocks, 105
FM, 23
Frequency trigger, 158
Function keys, 13

G
Gain, 117, 117
GB-2312, 178
GF, 103, 107

H
high-speed counting, 41
Hours counter, 154
Reading the MN and OT values, 156
Hysteresis, 169

I
inputs
High-speed inputs, 41
Inputs, 103
Analog inputs, 41, 104
Cursor keys, 105, 106
Digital Inputs, 103
inverting, 107, 119
Instructions
Basic functions (GF), 103
Co, 103
Connectors (Co), 103

GF, 107
SF, 119
Special Functions (SF), 103
Interlock, 33
Internet address, 5
Inverter, 113
ISO8859-1, 178
ISO8859-16, 178
ISO8859-5, 178
ISO8859-9, 178

L
Latching relay, 175, 175
LCD lifetime
LOGO! TD, 272
LED, 278
Levels, 106
Ln by Ln ticking, 183
Logical inputs, 114
LOGO! AM2 RTD, 4
LOGO! TD, 13
function keys, 13
power-up screen, 13
LOGO! TD
Display lifetime, 272
LOGO! TD
Backlight lifetime, 272

M
Math error
analog, 212
Memory
limitation, 98
Memory card, 227
Card → LOGO, 235
CopyProtect, 229
LOGO → Card, 233
Memory/battery card, 227
Message text charset flag, 105
Message texts, 178
character set, 178
Message ticking, 183
Mode
PC-LOGO, 239
Modems, 4
Multiple function switch, 139

LOGO!

290

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

Index

N
NAND, 109
Negation, 113
of an input, 107
of an SF input, 119
NOT, 113

O
Offset, 117
Off-time, 143
On-/Off- delay, 127
On-delay, 123
On-delay, retentinve, 129, 129
On-time, 143
Open connectors, 106
OR, 111
Outputs, 104
Analog outputs, 104
blank, 104
Digital outputs, 104
Overflow error, 212

P
Parameter
Inputs, 115
Set Param, 216
setting, 215
T, 115
Parameter assignment menu, 216
Parameter assignment screen form, 143, 182
Parameter protection, 117
PC-LOGO, 239
PI controller, 201
Program cycle, 275
Program memory, 98
Program name
change, 76
character set, 75
read, 216
Programming menu
AQ in Stop, 90, 90
AQ type, 91
Clear Prg, 92
Edit Name, 75
Edit Prg, 69
Password, 77
Pulse
Pause, 133
width, 133

Pulse generator
Asynchronous, 134
Pulse output, 130
Pulse relay, 176
Pulse Width Modulator (PWM), 206
PWM, 206

R
Random generator, 135
Real-time clock, 19
Relay outputs, 261, 261
service life, 261, 261
switching capacity, 261, 261
Removal, 33
Retentive memory, 98
Retentive on-delay, 129
Retentivity, 116

S
Sensor connections, 42
Set clock, 222
Setting the date, 221
Settings, 216
Setup
with different voltage classes, 29
SF, 103, 114, 119
Shift register, 191
Shift register bits, 105
Shift-JIS, 178
Signal status transitions, 40
Simulation, 237
Softkey, 189
Software, 237
Special functions, 103, 119
Analog amplifier, 173
Analog comparator, 165
Analog differential trigger, 163
Analog math, 209
Analog math error detection, 212
Analog multiplexer, 194
Analog ramp, 197
Analog threshold trigger, 160
Analog value monitoring, 170
Analog watchdog, 170
Asynchronous pulse generator, 134
Basics, 114
Edge-triggered wiping relay, 132
Hours counter, 154
Latching relay, 175

LOGO!
Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA

291

Index

Message texts, 178
Mutliple function switch, 139
Off-delay, 126
On-/Off- delay, 127
On-delay, 123
PI controller, 201
Pulse output, 130
Pulse relay, 176
Pulse Width Modulator (PWM), 206
Random generator, 135
Relays, 130, 132, 175, 176
Retentive on-delay, 129
Shift register, 191
Softkey, 189
Stairway lighting switch, 137
Threshold trigger, 158
Triggers, 160, 163
Up-down counter, 151
Weekly timer, 141
Wiping relay, 130
Yearly timer, 145
Stairway lighting switch, 137
Start, 81
Startup flag, 105
Stop, 216
Subunits, 31, 31
Summertime, 93
Summertime/wintertime conversion, 221
Clock, 93
S/W Time, 93
Switch
Multiple function, 139
Stairway lighting, 137
Switched current
maximum, 46
Synchronization, 221
Clock, 97
Sync, 97

T
Text Display (TD), 13
Threshold trigger, 158
Ticker, 183
Time response, 115
Timebase, 115, 124
Timer
accuracy, 115
Timers
Asynchronous pulse generator, 134
Edge-triggered wiping relay, 132
Multiple function switch, 139

Off-delay, 126
On-/Off- delay, 127
On-delay, 123
Random generator, 135
Retentive on-delay, 129
Stairway lighting switch, 137
Weekly, 141
Wiping relay (pulse output), 130
Yearly, 145
Timing inaccuracy, 115
Trigger
Analog differential, 163
Analog threshold, 160

U
Underflow error, 212
Unused connectors, 59, 65
Up/down counter, 151

V
Voltage levels, 106
Voltage supply
Circuit protection, 38

W
Weekly timer, 141, 144
Examples, 144
setting, 144
Wintertime, 93
Wiping relay
edge triggered, 132
Wire ferrules, 36
without display
PC-LOGO mode, 239

X
XOR, 113

Y
Yearly timer, 145

Z
Zero division error, 212
Zero offset, 117

LOGO!

292

Manual, 10/2017, A5E01248535-AA



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : RC-CN DF FA R&D
Comments                        : 
Company                         : Siemens AG
Create Date                     : 2017:09:30 16:50:48+08:00
Keywords                        : A5E01248535-AA;, 10/2017
Modify Date                     : 2017:10:20 13:22:06+08:00
Source Modified                 : D:20170930084702
Subject                         : Manual
Company-long                    : Siemens AG
Company-short                   : Siemens
Document-class                  : Manual
Document-class-mrl              : ​
Edition                         : 10/2017
Order-nr                        : A5E01248535-AA
Print-year                      : 2017
Product-group                   : ​
System                          : ​
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2017:10:20 13:22:06+08:00
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 10.0 for Word
Document ID                     : uuid:70dcd718-54f6-4017-923e-2ed8eb687e4a
Instance ID                     : uuid:dbffc2fb-5098-4208-b09c-5ea7d9d1884c
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : LOGO!
Description                     : Manual
Creator                         : RC-CN DF FA R&D
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 10.0
Headline                        : Manual
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 292

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools